Location via proxy:   [ UP ]  
[Report a bug]   [Manage cookies]                

Winmax Mill Start r0116-110b

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 194

GETTING STARTED WITH

WINMAX MILL

Dual Screen and Max Consoles


for Hurco Machining Centers

February 2010 704-0116-110 Revision B


The information in this document is subject to change without notice and does not
represent a commitment on the part of Hurco Companies, Inc. (Hurco). The software
described in this document is furnished under the License Agreement to customers. It is
against the law to copy the software on any medium except as specifically allowed in the
license agreement. The purchaser may make copies of the software for backup purposes.
No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means,
electronic or mechanical, including photocopying, for any purpose without the express
written permission of the Hurco machine tool owner.

Hurco Manufacturing Company reserves the right to incorporate any modification or


improvements in machines and machine specifications which it considers necessary, and
does not assume any obligation to make any said changes in machines or equipment
previously sold.

Hurco products and services are subject to Hurco’s then current prices, terms, and
conditions, which are subject to change without notice.

© 2010 Hurco Companies, Inc. All rights reserved.

Patents: U.S. Patents B14,477,754; 5,453,933; Canadian Patent 1,102,434;


Japanese Patents 1,649,006 and 1,375,124; other Patents pending.

Hurco, Max, Ultimax, and WinMax are Registered Trademarks of Hurco Companies, Inc.

AutoCAD, Autodesk, and DXF are registered trademarks of Autodesk, Inc.

MS-DOS, Microsoft, and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.

Many of the designations used by manufacturers and sellers to distinguish their products
are claimed as trademarks. Hurco has listed here all trademarks of which it is aware. For
more information about Hurco products and services, contact:

Hurco Companies, Inc.


One Technology Way
P.O. Box 68180
Indianapolis, IN 46268-0180
Tel (317) 293-5309 (products)
(317) 298-2635 (service)
Fax (317) 328-2812 (service)

For Hurco subsidiary contact information, go to Hurco’s Web site:


www.hurco.com

ii - Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-110 Getting Started with WinMax Mill
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Using This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiii
Sample Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiii
Using the Touchscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xv
Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xv
Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xv

Using and Printing the Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvi


Using the On-screen Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvi
Printing the Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvii

Machine and Console Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 1


Machine Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 2
Consoles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 3
WinMax Interface Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 4
Edit Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 4
Full Precision Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 5
Softkeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 5
Drop-down Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 6
Expand and Collapse Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 6
Sorting and Resizing Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 6
Pop-ups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 7
Status Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 8
Calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 8
On-screen Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 9
Accessing the WinMax Help in PDF format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 10
Control Panel Function Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 11
Emergency Stop Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 13
Programming Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 13
Text Screen Data Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 13
Programming Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 13
Text Screen Cursor Control Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 14
Numeric Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 14
Optional Computer Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 14
Axis, Spindle, and Machine Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 15
Override Knobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 15
Jog Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 16
Setting Jog Unit Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 18
Machine Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 19
Machine Operations Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 20
Machine Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 20
Stop Motion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 20
Spindle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 21
Tool Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 21
Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 21
Communications Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 22
RS-232C Serial Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 22
Indexer Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 23
Network Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 23
USB Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 23
Automatic Tool Changers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 24

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-110 Table of Contents -iii


Loading a Tool into the Spindle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 24
Unloading a Tool from the Spindle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 24
Loading Tools into the ATC Magazine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 25
Removing Tools from the ATC Magazine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 26
Large Tools in the ATC Magazine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 26
Machine Start Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 27
Calibrate Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 27
Establishing Servo Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 27
Axes Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 27
Warm Up Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 27
Reset Master . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 28
Recovery and Restart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 28
Stop Machine Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 29
Emergency Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 29
Park Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 29
Control Power Off Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 30

Program Manager . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 1
Managing Program Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 1
Program Properties . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 4
Disk Operations . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 5
FTP Manager . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 6
FTP Host List . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 7
FTP Host Properties .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 7

Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 1
System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 2
Display WinMax Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 2
Display Machine Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 2
Backup Config & Machine Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 3
Restore Config & Machine Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 3
User Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 3
User Interface Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 4
Conversational Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 5
NC Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 5
Autosave Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 6
Tool Utilities and Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 6
Tool Information Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 8
Import and Export . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 10
Machine Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 11
Machine Parameters Page 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 11
Coolant Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 13
Coolant Delay Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 14
Pulsating or Delay Washdown Enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 14
Alt Washdown Dwell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 15
Alt Dwell Lt Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 16
Alt Washdown Off Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 17
Washdown On Delay Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 17
Washdown Off Delay Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 18
Examples for Coolant Parameters Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 19
Control Power Off Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 20
Disable Tool Picker Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 20
Enable Dual Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 20
Machine Parameters Page 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 20
Cal to LS Velocity Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 22

- iv Table of Contents 704-0116-110 Machine Getting Started with WinMax Mill


Auto Balance Enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 22
ATC and Rapid Override Disable Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 22
ATC Disable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 22
Rapid Override Disable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 22
Axis Safety Position Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 23
Tilt Axis Safety Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 23
X-Axis and Y-Axis Safety Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 23
ATC Z-Axis Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 24
ATC Z-Axis Move to Zero Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 24
Machine Parameters Page 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 24
Aux Output Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 25
Aux Output 1, 2, 3, 4 Confirmation Enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 25
Disable Aux Out 1, 2, 3, 4 During Interrupt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 25
Move to Safety Pos Manual Mode ATC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 26
Chip Conveyor Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 26
Chip Conveyor On/Off Delay Enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 26
Chip Conveyor On Delay Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 26
Chip Conveyor Off Delay Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 26
Machine Parameters Page 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 27
Warm Up Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 29
Disable Auto On Chip Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 29
Axis Feedrate Override Min (%) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 29
Rapid Feedrate Override Min (%) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 30
Dual Tool Probe Present . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 30
Serial Port Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 30
FTP Server Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 31
WinMax Uptime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 31
Select Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 31
Language Registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 31
Data Logging Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 31
Additional Utilities Softkeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 32
Printing Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 32
Part Program Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 32
Probing Data Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 33
Integrator Support Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 33
Restart Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 33
Shutdown Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 34
Serial I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 34
Log Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 35
Active Error Listing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 35
Active Status Listing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 35
Error History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 36
Status History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 36
Retrieve Log and Diagnostic Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 37
Export Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 37

Programming Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 1
Input Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 2
Erase Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 2
Part Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 3
Part Setup Coordinate Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 5
Machine Coordinate System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 5
Unrotated Coordinate System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 5
Workpiece Coordinate System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 5
5-Axis Part Setup Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 7

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-110 Table of Contents -v


Part Setup Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 8
Digital Read Out (DRO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 10
Part Setup Softkeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 11
Part Fixturing and Tool Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 11
Work Offsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 12
Auxiliary Work Offsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 12
Stock Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 13
Tool Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 14
Tool Calibration Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 14
Zero Calibration Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 15
Absolute Tool Length mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 15
Setup of Gauge Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 15
Tool Setup Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 18
Tool Setup Softkeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 22
Advanced Tool Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 23
Tool Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 24
Feed and Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 26
Feed and Speed Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 27
Speed Formulas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 27
Feed Formulas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 28
NC SFQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 28
Supplier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 28
Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 28
Edit Apt Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 29
Change Tool Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 29
Part Program Tool Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 30
Part Program Tool Review for NC Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 31
Part Program Tool Review Softkeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 32
Tool Matching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 33
Tool Matching Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 33
Tool Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 35
Spindle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 35
Auto . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 35
Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 36
Tool and Material Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 37
Program Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 38
General Parameters 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 39
General Parameters 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 40
Milling Parameters 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 41
Milling Parameters 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 44
Holes Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 45
Probing Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 46
Performance Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 47
Import Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 48
Conversational Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 48
NC States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 48
Importing NC States into Conversational Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 49
Copy and Change Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 50
Copy, Move, or Delete Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 51
Modify Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 51
Changing Feeds, Speeds, and Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 52
Change Surface Finish Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 52
Review Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 53
Auto Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 55
Auto Mode Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 56

- vi Table of Contents 704-0116-110 Machine Getting Started with WinMax Mill


Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 58
Manual Function Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 58
Manual Rapid Move . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 59
Automatic Tool Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 61
VM Tool Magazine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 61
Types of Automatic Tool Changers (ATC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 61
40-Taper ATC with 24- or 40-Station Tool Magazine . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 61
ATC Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 61
50-Taper ATC with 30 or 32-Station Tool Magazine . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 63
HTX500 and VTXU Tool Magazine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 64
HTX500 Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 64
VTXU Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 64
ATC and Machine Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 65
HTX500 Machine and ATC Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 65
HTX500 ATC Status Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 66
HTX500 ATC Diagnostics Softkeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 67
HTX 500 I/O Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 68
VM, VMX, and VTXU ATC & Machine Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 69
ATC & Machine Diagnostics Input Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 70
VM, VMX, and VTXU ATC & Machine Diagnostics Softkeys . . . . . . .4 - 71
HTX Automatic Pallet Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 72
Squaring the APC Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 72
Operating the APC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 73
APC Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 74
APC Status Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 74
APC Diagnostics Softkeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 75
Manually Operate the APC from the Load Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 76
Remote APC Panel Pushbuttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 76
Manual APC Table Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 78
Manual Safety Override Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 79
CE Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 79
Entering the Access Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 80
Changing an Existing Access Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 81
Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 82
Graphics Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 82
Display Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 82
Performance Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 82
Axis Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 83
Toolpath and Solid Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 83

Record of Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-110 Table of Contents -vii


- viii Table of Contents 704-0116-110 Machine Getting Started with WinMax Mill
LIST OF FIGURES
Figure 1–1. Hurco Machine with the Dual-Screen Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 -2
Figure 1–2. Dual-Screen and Single-Screen Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 -3
Figure 1–3. Full Precision Editing Pop-up Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 -5
Figure 1–4. Example of a drop-down list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 -6
Figure 1–5. Example of Expand and Collapse Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 -6
Figure 1–6. Example of Sorting and Resizing Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 -6
Figure 1–7. Pop-up message example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 -7
Figure 1–8. Pop-up showing minimize and close icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 -7
Figure 1–9. Status Bar and other areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 -8
Figure 1–10.Calculator pop-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 -8
Figure 1–11.Dual-Screen Console Panel Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 11
Figure 1–12.Single-Screen Console Panel Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 12
Figure 1–13.Remote Jog Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 16
Figure 1–14.Communications Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 22
Figure 1–15.Male 9-Pin D-Type Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 22

Figure 2–1. WinMax Program Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 -1


Figure 2–2. Load Program screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 -2
Figure 2–3. Disk Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 -5
Figure 3–1. Machine Parameters, Page 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 11
Figure 3–2. Machine Parameters, HTX500 (left) and VTXU (right), Page 2 . . . . . 3 - 20
Figure 3–3. Machine Parameters, Page 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 24
Figure 3–4. Machine Parameters, Page 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 27

Figure 4–1. Part Zero Relative to Machine Zero Viewed Looking Down at Table . 4 -3
Figure 4–2. Axis Motion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..... . 4 -4
Figure 4–3. Part Zero in Z (Tool Zero Calibration Plane) . . . . . . . . . . . ..... . 4 -4
Figure 4–4. Part Setup Coordinate Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..... . 4 -6
Figure 4–5. 5-Axis Part Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..... . 4 -7
Figure 4–6. Offset Z or Part Zero Z . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..... . 4 -9
Figure 4–7. Safety Work Region . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..... . 4 - 10
Figure 4–8. Work Offsets on a dual-zone machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..... . 4 - 12
Figure 4–9. Tool Measurement screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..... . 4 - 16
Figure 4–10.Tool Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..... . 4 - 24
Figure 4–11.Advanced Tool Settings: Feed and Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..... . 4 - 26
Figure 4–1. Tool Matching Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..... . 4 - 34
Figure 4–2. Blend Offset and Blend Overlap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..... . 4 - 41
Figure 4–3. Cutter Compensation using the Insert Arc parameter . . . . . ..... . 4 - 43
Figure 4–4. Cutter Compensation using the Insert Line parameter . . . . ..... . 4 - 44
Figure 4–5. Program Review Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..... . 4 - 53
Figure 4–6. Auto Mode Monitoring screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..... . 4 - 57
Figure 4–7. VMX 40-Taper ATC with 24-station Tool Magazine . . . . . . . ..... . 4 - 62
Figure 4–8. VMX 64/50-Taper, 32 Station ATC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..... . 4 - 63
Figure 4–9. Machine Diagnostics Screen for HTX500 Machine . . . . . . . . ..... . 4 - 65
Figure 4–10.HTX500 ATC Diagnostics Screen, Status Condition Fields . . ..... . 4 - 66
Figure 4–11.ATC & Machine Diagnostics Screen, Page 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . ..... . 4 - 69
Figure 4–12.Machine Function Screen with M Code List . . . . . . . . . . . . ..... . 4 - 73
Figure 4–13.APC Diagnostics Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..... . 4 - 74

WinMax Mill 704-0116-110 List of Figures -ix


Figure 4–14.Remote APC Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 76
Figure 4–15.CE Status & Diagnostics Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 80
Figure 4–16.Solid graphic display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 83

-x List of Figures 704-0116-110 WinMax Mill


USING THIS MANUAL
This documentation uses several conventions to explain the safety features and
emphasize key concepts. These conventions are described in this section.

Additional information is available on the machine’s Documentation CD.

Sample Screens
Sample screens in this documentation were taken from a WinMax Mill single-screen
control. All screens are subject to change. The screens on your system may vary slightly.
The sample screen here illustrates softkeys and includes a software version.

WinMax Version

Softkeys

Prompts

Error/Status area

Status Bar

Softkeys
Softkeys are located on the side of the screen. You can set the softkeys to appear on
either the right or left side of the screen. Refer to the Getting Started with WinMax Mill for
information about making this selection. Softkeys may change upon field entries or other
softkey selection. References to softkeys in the documentation appear with the softkey’s
corresponding F-key. For example, the Part Setup softkey from the Input screen above is
referenced as the PART SETUP F1 softkey.

Screen Areas
The screens are divided into the following areas, in addition to the row of softkeys:

Data Entry
The data entry area is located on the opposite side of the screen from the softkeys.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-110 Using This Manual — xiii
Available softkeys may change even when the text and data entry area does not.

Fields in the data entry area display or receive information. Refer to Using the
Touchscreen, on page xv for information on entering information in fields.

Prompts and Error/Status Area


The bottom portion of the screen is reserved for prompts, program status and error
messages.

Prompts provide help on data entry selections based on the field with the blinking cursor.

Errors and status messages occur anytime the status or error occurs. They are not based
on the field with the blinking cursor. These messages provide machine information to the
operator.

Error messages may also stop and/or prevent machine operation until the cause of the
error is corrected.

Status Bar
The status bar contains

• The name of the open, selected program.


• A calculator icon—select the icon to display a working, on-screen calculator.
• Units of measure (Inch or Millimeters)—select the units of measure in the
status bar to toggle between Inch and Metric.
• Programming mode (R for Radius; D for Diameter)—select the programming
mode in the status bar to toggle between Radius and Diameter.
• A yellow icon—indicates the feed hold is on when visible.
• A red icon—indicates the Emergency Stop button has been pressed when
visible.
• A keyboard icon—select the icon to display a working on-screen keyboard.
• The current time.

When viewed on a single-screen console, all icons appear in the same status bar; when
viewed on a dual-screen console, the program name and calculator icon appear on the
left screen status bar, and the unit of measure, keyboard icon and time appear on the
right screen status bar.

Console Buttons and Keys


References to console buttons and keys appear in bold text throughout the
documentation. For example, the Start Cycle button appears as the Start Cycle button
and the Manual key appears as the Manual console key in text.

Refer to the Getting Started with Your WinMax Mill for information about console buttons
and keys, in addition to other information about using softkeys and the pop-up text entry
window.

xiv - Using This Manual 704-0116-110 Getting Started with WinMax Mill
Using the Touchscreen
The console has a touchscreen for entering programming data. To make a selection, tap
the screen on a softkey, field, or drop-down list using the stylus attached to the side of
the console or another suitable pointing device.

Printing
To print part or all of this manual from the CD, select File/Print. Be sure to review the
Print Range selections and make the appropriate choice for pages. Select Properties/
Paper/Quality and adjust the Tray Selection/Paper Source if necessary.

Printing to a Post Script printer provides the best results.

Icons
This manual may contain the following icons:

Caution/Warning

The operator may be injured and the machine severely damaged if the
described procedure is not followed.

Hints and Tricks

Useful suggestions that show creative uses of the WinMax features.

Important

Ensures proper operation of the machine and control.

Troubleshooting

? Steps that can be taken to solve potential problems.

Where can we go from here?

Lists several possible options the operator can take.

Table of Contents
To assist with onscreen viewing, this icon is located on the cover page. Click
the icon to access the Table of Contents (TOC).

You can also access many of the same TOC entries from the Adobe Reader
bookmarks located on the left side of the PDF page.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-110 Using This Manual -xv
USING AND PRINTING THE HELP
Hurco provides documentation for using WinMax software on a control or desktop in two
formats: on-screen Help and PDF. The information contained in both formats is identical.

On-screen Help contains information about the current screen. If Help is not available for
a screen, a Welcome screen appears with access to the Table of Contents, Index, or
Search functions.

• To view the on-screen Help directly on a Hurco control, select either the Help
console button or the F console key followed by the 1 key (F1).
• To view the on-screen Help on the desktop software, select either the Help
icon in the menu bar or the F1 key on your keyboard.

PDF files are available on the hard drive. These files can be copied from the hard drive to
a USB memory device and transferred to a PC for viewing and printing.

Using the On-screen Help


On-screen Help provides information about using WinMax. The Help is context-sensitive
to the screen level. Press the console Help button to display the Help topic for the current
screen. The following list describes Help functions:

• Buttons in the upper left-hand corner of the Help screen are used to move
through Help topics and print screens.

• Use the Hide button to hide the navigation pane.


• Use the Back button to return to the previous Help screen.
• Use the Print button to print the current dispalyed Help topic, if a printer
is attached and configured. See Printing the Help for more information
about printing.

• Use the arrow buttons to move between pages within a Help topic and to
move through topics.
• Use the Contents tab for a list of information sorted by subject:
1. Select the “+” to expand the topic and view sub-topics.
2. Select the topic to display it.

• Use the Index tab to show the Help index:


1. Quickly scroll to an index topic by typing the topic in the box at the top of
the index.
2. Select a topic and the Display button to view the topic.

• Use the Search tab to search the Help for a word or phrase:
1. Type the search word(s) into the text box at the top of the pane.

xvi - Using and Printing the Help 704-0116-110 Getting Started with WinMax Mill
2. Select the List Topics button. A list of topics that contain the search
word(s) is displayed.
3. Select a topic and the Display button to view that topic.

• Use the Favorites tab to save Help topics for quick access:
1. Select the Add button at the bottom of the pane to add the current topic.
2. Select a topic from the Favorites list, and select the Display button to view
it.
• Select a topic from the Favorites list, and select the Remove button to
remove it from the list.

Printing the Help


The WinMax On-screen Help is also provided in PDF format for easy printing. The
information contained in the PDF files is identical to the on-screen Help. The PDF files
may be copied to a floppy disk or USB memory device to be transferred to a PC for
printing. Here are the steps to access the PDF files:

1. From the Input screen, select the PROGRAM MANAGER F8 softkey.


2. Select the DISK OPERATIONS F7 softkey.
3. In the left-hand pane, navigate through the folders:

• For WinMax Mill on a machine, the path is D:\Hurco\Winmax Mill\hlp.


• For WinMax Desktop on a PC, the path is C:\Program Files\Winmax
Mill\hlp.
The PDF files will appear in the right-hand pane.

The SHOW ALL FILE TYPES field in User Interface Settings must be
set to YES (default is NO) in order to see the PDF files in the
directory. Access the SHOW ALL FILE TYPES field in Auxiliary Mode,
Utilities/ User Preferences/ User Interface Settings.

4. Highlight the PDF file(s) in the right-hand pane, and select the COPY F2
softkey.
5. Ensure that your media is loaded (either a floppy disk in the disk drive or a
USB memory device in the USB port), and navigate to the proper location in
the left-hand pane of the DISK OPERATIONS screen (either the floppy drive A:
or the USB port E:). Highlight the desired location.
6. Place the cursor in the right-hand pane and select the PASTE F3 softkey to
paste the PDF file(s) to the desired location.

You may now remove your media and load the PDF file(s) onto a PC for printing.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-110 Using and Printing the Help -xvii
A - xviii 704-0116-110 Getting Started with WinMax Mill
MACHINE AND CONSOLE BASICS
These topics are discussed in this section:

Machine Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 2
Consoles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 3
WinMax Interface Environment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 4
Communications Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 22
Automatic Tool Changers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 24
Machine Start Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 27
Recovery and Restart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 28
Stop Machine Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 29

Machine Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-110 Machine and Console Basics 1-1
Machine Components
Before using the machine, you should become familiar with its components. Because of
European Committee (CE) requirements, Hurco machines sold in Europe differ somewhat
from those sold elsewhere. The figure below identifies some of the easily recognized
components of a machine. The console is in front of the machine, facing the operator’s
area.

1 Console

2 Way Cover

3 Table

4 Spindle

5 Power Drawbar

6 Spindle Motor

7 Z-Axis Servo

8 Column

9 Base

Figure 1–1. Hurco Machine with the Dual-Screen Console

Hurco machines are available with several hardware and software options. Information
about these options is available from Hurco or your Hurco Distributor.

1 - 2 Machine and Console Basics 704-0116-110 Machine Getting Started with WinMax Mill
Consoles
The dual-screen and single-screen consoles use WinMax software:

Figure 1–2. Dual-Screen and Single-Screen Console

The console, and the electrical components required to operate it, are called the “control”
or the “CNC” (Computer Numeric Control). Some of the electrical components are built
into a separate enclosure kept in the machine’s electrical cabinet.

Some of the control’s internal components, such as disk drives and memory, are like
those in a PC. Disk operations, such as copying, deleting and storing files, are also
similar.

The floppy drive is located on the console’s right side panel. To protect the drive from
debris, the protective floppy drive cover should be closed, except when inserting or
removing a diskette.

Information about options is available from Hurco or your Hurco distributor.

Machine Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-110 Machine and Console Basics 1-3
WinMax Interface Environment
There are three ways to navigate and enter data for programming:

• Touchscreen—use the stylus or other pointing device to select softkeys and


drop-down lists for data entry and programming.
• Keyboard—use the function (F1-F12) keys and other keyboard shortcuts for
navigation and to call up screens.
• Ultimax classic edit mode—use the console keys; for example, use the
arrow keys for navigation and the enter key to accept data typed into a field.
See Edit Mode below for more information.

Edit Mode
Edit Mode is set in Utilities. Refer to User Interface Settings, on page 3 - 4. WinMax has
two edit modes:

• Ultimax Classic (default)—in this mode the console arrow keys are used to
move between blocks and segments, and the enter key is used to accept data
after it is typed into a field.
• Windows Dialog—in this mode the console arrow keys do not navigate
through fields and the enter key is not required to accept data typed into a
field.

If you want to... Ultimax Classic Windows Dialog

Enter data into a field Enter key to accept data Enter key to accept data
OR
Down (or Up) arrow to
accept data

Advance to next block Right/Left arrows Next Block/Previous Block


OR softkeys
Next Block/Previous Block OR
softkeys Page Up or Page Down key
OR
Page Up or Page Down key

Advance to next segment Right/Left arrows Next segment/hole softkeys


or operation OR OR
Next segment/hole softkeys Page Up or Page Down key
OR
Page Up or Page Down key

Navigate to next or Left or right arrow keys Page Up or Page Down keys
previous tool in Tool Setup

The right and left arrows will change the selection in fields with drop-
down lists (such as Tool Type in Tool Setup) in either Ultimax Classic
or Windows Dialog mode.

1 - 4 Machine and Console Basics 704-0116-110 Machine Getting Started with WinMax Mill
Full Precision Editing
Numbers with decimals are rounded to the decimal display limit (three digits for metric
and four digits for imperial) when displayed in a field. Full Precision Editing allows you to
view the full number (up to 12 digits after the decimal) and/or to edit it to a more precise
point. With the cursor in a numeric decimal field, press F + decimal (.) on a machine, or
Ctrl + decimal (.) on the desktop to open a pop-up box containing the number.

Figure 1–3. Full Precision Editing Pop-up Box

Edit the number and select OK to save the changes. To close the pop-up box without
saving changes, select Cancel.

Do not use Full Precision Editing to change numbers that are


automatically calculated by WinMax. These numbers are calculated
to their 12-digit maximum accuracy and changing them could result
in changes to other automatic calculations in the program.

Softkeys
Softkeys appear as buttons on the screen; their default location is the right side of the
screen, but they can also be positioned on the left by changing the setting in User
Preferences (see Utilities, on page 3 - 1 for more information). Select a softkey using
one of these methods:

• On the screen, select the softkey.


• On the console, simultaneously press the F key and the number that
corresponds to the softkey (for example, F + 1 will select the F1 softkey). For
dual-console machines, ALT + the softkey number will select softkeys on the
graphics screen.
• On the keyboard (if using), press the corresponding function key (F1, F2, F3,
etc).

Machine Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-110 Machine and Console Basics 1-5
Drop-down Lists
Many fields contain a choice of items that are viewed by pulling down a list:

Touch the small


arrow to view a
drop-down list; use
arrow keys to
highlight choice
and Enter console
button to select

Figure 1–4. Example of a drop-down list

Expand and Collapse Files


In the Program Manager, files can be expanded or collapsed as follows:

Touch the “+” to expand


and view the files and
folders in a folder

Touch the “-” to collapse


(close) and hide the
files and folders in a
folder

Figure 1–5. Example of Expand and Collapse Files

Sorting and Resizing Columns


On screens that contain columns, data in a column can be sorted ascending to
descending or descending to ascending by selecting the column heading. Columns can be
resized by dragging the column divider in the header.

Select and drag to resize column


Select to sort column

Figure 1–6. Example of Sorting and Resizing Columns

1 - 6 Machine and Console Basics 704-0116-110 Machine Getting Started with WinMax Mill
Pop-ups
During machine operation and programming, pop-up boxes may be displayed to convey
prompts or status messages. These pop-up boxes can be closed by selecting the
appropriate button (i.e., YES or NO or OK). Some pop-up boxes may only provide
informational messages and will be displayed for a few seconds before they automatically
close.

Figure 1–7. Pop-up message example

Certain pop-ups, such as the calculator and virtual keyboard, can be minimized by
touching the “—” in the upper right corner. These pop-ups will remain open but are
“hidden” in the taskbar, and can be viewed again by touching the taskbar button. These
pop-ups can also be closed by touching the “X” in the upper right corner:

Minimize
Close

Figure 1–8. Pop-up showing minimize and close icons

Machine Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-110 Machine and Console Basics 1-7
Status Bar
The Status Bar appears at the bottom of every WinMax screen. It displays the program
name of the current active part program, a calculator icon, the current unit of measure
(inch or mm), the keyboard icon, and the current time. When viewed on a single screen
console, all icons appear in the same status bar; when viewed on a dual-screen console,
the program name and calculator icon appear on the left screen status bar, and the unit
of measure, keyboard icon and time appear on the right screen status bar.

• To use the calculator function, touch the calculator icon.


• To use the on-screen keyboard, touch the keyboard icon.
• To change the unit of measure, touch the unit of measure abbreviation.

WinMax Version

Softkeys

Prompts

Error/Status area

Status Bar

Figure 1–9. Status Bar and other areas

Calculator

Select the calculator icon in the Status Bar to open the calculator. The calculator appears
on screen and is operated using the stylus to select the calculator keys on screen.

Figure 1–10. Calculator pop-up

When the calculator is minimized (with “—” in the upper right), the last calculation is

1 - 8 Machine and Console Basics 704-0116-110 Machine Getting Started with WinMax Mill
retained, but when it is closed (with “X” in the upper right), the last calculation is erased.

On-screen Help
On-screen Help provides information about using WinMax. The Help is context-sensitive
to the screen level. Press the console Help button to display the Help topic for the current
screen. The following list describes Help functions:

• Buttons in the upper left-hand corner of the Help screen are used to move
through Help topics and print screens.
• Use the Hide button to hide the navigation pane.
• Use the Back button to return to the previous Help screen.
• Use the Print button to print the current displayed Help topic, if a printer
is attached and configured. See Accessing the WinMax Help in PDF
format, on page 1 - 10 for more information about printing.

• Use the arrow buttons to move between pages within a Help topic and to
move through topics.
• Use the Contents tab for a list of information sorted by subject:
1. Select the “+” to expand the topic and view sub-topics.
2. Select the topic to display it.
• Use the Index tab to show the Help index:
1. Quickly scroll to an index topic by typing the topic in the box at the top of
the index.
2. Select a topic and the Display button to view the topic.
• Use the Search tab to search the Help for a word or phrase:
1. Type the search word(s) into the text box at the top of the pane.
2. Select the List Topics button. A list of topics that contain the search
word(s) is displayed.
3. Select a topic and the Display button to view that topic.
• Use the Favorites tab to save Help topics for quick access:
1. Select the Add button at the bottom of the pane to add the current topic.
2. Select a topic from the Favorites list, and select the Display button to view
it.
3. Select a topic from the Favorites list, and select the Remove button to
remove it from the list.

Machine Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-110 Machine and Console Basics 1-9
Accessing the WinMax Help in PDF format
The WinMax On-screen Help is also provided in PDF format for easy printing. The
information contained in the PDF files is identical to the on-screen Help. The PDF files
may be copied to a floppy disk or USB memory device to be transferred to a PC for
viewing or printing. Here are the steps to access the PDF files:

1. From the Input screen, select the PROGRAM MANAGER F8 softkey.


2. Select the DISK OPERATIONS F7 softkey.
3. In the left-hand pane, navigate through the folders:
• For WinMax Mill on a machine, the path is D:\Hurco\Winmax Mill\hlp
• For WinMax Desktop on a PC, the path is C:\Program Files\Winmax
Mill\hlp
The PDF files will appear in the right-hand pane.

The SHOW ALL FILE TYPES field in User Interface Settings must be
set to YES (default is NO) in order to see the PDF files in the
directory. Access the SHOW ALL FILE TYPES field in Auxiliary Mode,
Utilities/ User Preferences/ User Interface Settings.

4. Highlight the PDF file(s) in the right-hand pane, and select the COPY F2
softkey.
5. Ensure that your media is loaded (either a floppy disk in the disk drive or a
USB memory device in the USB port), and navigate to the proper location in
the left-hand pane of the DISK OPERATIONS screen (either the floppy drive A:
or the USB port E:). Highlight the desired location.
6. Place the cursor in the right-hand pane and select the PASTE F3 softkey to
paste the PDF file(s) to the desired location.
7. You may now remove your media and load the PDF file(s) onto a PC for
viewing and printing.

1 - 10 Machine and Console Basics 704-0116-110 Machine Getting Started with WinMax Mill
Control Panel Function Groups
The buttons, keys, and knobs on the dual- and single-screen consoles are grouped by
their functions. Here are the control panel groups on a dual-screen console:

1 Touchscreen softkeys

2 Text screen

3 Graphics screen

4 Brightness control

5 Machine operation keys

6 Emergency stop

7 Trackball

8 Programming keyboard

9 Remote jog

10 Emergency stop

11 Axis, spindle, and machine control

12 Power on button

Figure 1–11. Dual-Screen Console Panel Groups

Machine Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-110 Machine and Console Basics 1-11
The dual-screen console also has a power on button, emergency stop button, and
brightness control thumbwheels for the Text screen and Graphics screen. Some consoles
are also equipped with contrast control thumbwheels.

Here are the control panel groups on a single-screen console:

1 Power On Button

2 Emergency Stop Button

3 Axis, Spindle, and Machine Control Dials

4 Machine Operation Keys

5 Console Jog Unit

6 Programming Keyboard

Figure 1–12. Single-Screen Console Panel Groups

1 - 12 Machine and Console Basics 704-0116-110 Machine Getting Started with WinMax Mill
Emergency Stop Buttons
There is an Emergency Stop button located on each console and one on the Remote Jog
Unit. Press the Emergency Stop button to stop all spindle and table motion. This button
locks down when pressed. To release it, twist the button in the direction indicated by the
arrows.

Learn the location of all Emergency Stop buttons on the machining


center before operating.

If the Emergency Stop button is pressed during execution of a part


program, the tool must be jogged clear of the part before resuming
operation.

When the Emergency Stop button is pressed, a special error file is created and saved to
the machine hard drive in a folder called NavESTOP. These files record the machine
conditions at the time the Emergency Stop button is pressed. These files can be retrieved
when necessary for service purposes; refer to Retrieve Log and Diagnostic Files, on page
3 - 37 for more information.

Programming Keyboard
Program a job at the machine while reading from a blueprint or program worksheet. The
prompts on the Text screen lead you through each element of a part program. Enter
machine operations, part dimensions, and other parameters by selecting the appropriate
screen softkeys and console buttons.

Set up and run part programs, and manage part program files using the following data
entry keys:

• Text Screen Data Entry


• Softkeys
• Numeric Keypad
• Pop-up Text Entry Window
• Graphics Screen Data Entry

Text Screen Data Entry


Text screen data entry keys are used for entering programming information into the Text
screen’s fields. These keys are located in the center of the console’s Programming
Keypad.

Programming Mode

Programming Mode console keys are named for the screens they activate:

• Input – displays the main programming screen used to create and edit part
programs. From this screen, access Part Setup, Tool Setup, Part
Programming, Program Parameters, Copy and Change Blocks, and Restore
and Erase menus.

Machine Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-110 Machine and Console Basics 1-13
• Auxiliary – accesses program storage management, system configuration
settings, DXF files, reset master, and the upgrade system files menus.
• Review – for Conversational programs, provides an outline view of the
blocks currently programmed, including type of block and tool used. Jump to
a desired block by typing the block number and pressing Enter. For Numerical
Control (NC) programs, the Review key displays or re-displays the NC part
program.
• Help – displays help text. Place the cursor on a field in question and press
the Help key. If help text is available, it will appear in a pop-up window. Help
is not available for all screens.

These keys function as they would on a standard PC keyboard:

• Insert - type over and replace current text.


• Delete - delete the character to the right of the cursor.
• Home - position the cursor before a line of text.
• End - position the cursor at the end of a line of text.
• Page Up - position the cursor at the beginning of the previous page.
• Page Down - position the cursor at the beginning of the next page.

Text Screen Cursor Control Keys

These keys control cursor movement and perform programming operations:

• Arrow keys - move the cursor from one field to the next, or advance a part
program to the next data block.

• Enter key (↵) - accept the information typed in a text field, or move to the
next field.
• Special Function keys
• C console key - Use the C console and Clear keys to delete the value at the
current cursor position.
• Delete console key - Use the F console and Delete keys together to delete
the character to the left of the cursor.
• Arrow console key - Use the F console key in combination with the arrow keys
to quickly move the graphics cursor on the graphics screen.

Numeric Keypad
The numeric keypad allows you to enter numbers and calculate values in the Text screen.
Perform the following operations with this keypad:

• Enter numeric data into fields on the screen.


• Perform calculations using the mathematical symbols (÷, ×, −, +) on the
keypad.

Optional Computer Keyboard

If the console is equipped with an optional computer keyboard, use it to enter data into a
field. Press the Enter key to update a field and advance the cursor.

1 - 14 Machine and Console Basics 704-0116-110 Machine Getting Started with WinMax Mill
Axis, Spindle, and Machine Control
The following keys and knobs are used to control machine movement and adjust the
spindle and axes.

Override Knobs
Three knobs on the upper console allow you to override the programmed axis feedrate,
rapid, and spindle speed.

The Override knobs function as follows:

• Axis Feed Rate - controls the programmed axis feedrate during an auto run
program. Turning the dial to counterclockwise slows the feedrate; turning the
dial to clockwise speeds the feedrate. Selecting Min slows the spindle to 10%
of the nominal value. Selecting Max increases the feedrate to 150% of the
nominal value.
• Spindle Speed - controls the spindle speed. Turning the dial
counterclockwise slows the spindle; turning the dial clockwise increases
spindle speed. Selecting Min slows spindle speed to 640 RPM slower than the
nominal value. Selecting Max increases spindle speed to 640 RPM faster than
the nominal value.
• Rapid Override - overrides the programmed rapid traverse; the speed at
which the table moves from one point to another. Selecting Min slows the
table speed to 10% of the nominal value. Selecting Max increases the table
speed to 150% of the nominal value.

Machine Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-110 Machine and Console Basics 1-15
Jog Unit
Use the Jog Unit to manually jog the axes. The Console Jog Unit is on the Max console.
The hand-held Remote Jog Unit can be removed from the console and carried closer to
the work piece.

1 Emergency Stop Button

2 Store Position Key

3 Hand Wheel Multiplier Keys

4 Jog Hand Wheel

5 Jog Feed Keys

6 Jog Feed Override

7 Axis Select Switch

Figure 1–13. Remote Jog Unit

1 - 16 Machine and Console Basics 704-0116-110 Machine Getting Started with WinMax Mill
Both the Console Jog Unit and the Remote Jog Unit function the same:

1. Select an axis with the Axis Select Switch.


2. Use the Jog Feed Keys:
a. Select either the + or – Jog Feed Keys.
b. Adjust Jog Feed Override to override the programmed axis feedrate.
OR

3. Use the Hand Wheel Multiplier:


a. Select a hand wheel resolution with one of the Hand Wheel Multiplier Keys.
b. Rotate the Jog Hand Wheel.
Other than the Emergency Stop button, the Jog Unit does not affect
running programs.

The dials on a Jog Unit are defined as follows:

• Axis Select Switch – select the axis to jog (0, X, Y, Z, A, B).


• Jog Feed Override – control the jog speed (10% to 150%) of the nominal
value. Use this dial to touch off the tool and move the X and Y axes to touch
off the part for Tool and Part Setup.
• Jog Feed Keys - select minus (-) or plus (+) jog direction.
• Jog Hand Wheel - select minus (-) or plus (+) jog direction.
• Hand Wheel Multiplier Keys - define the hand wheel resolution.
• x1 - defines a one-to-one ratio (each click equals .0001 inch, or .00254
mm).
• x10 - defines a 10-to-one ratio (each click equals .001 inch, or .0254
mm).
• x100 - defines a 100-to-one ratio (each click equals 0.01 inch, or .254
mm. One full turn equals 1 inch, or 25.4 mm).

• Store Position Key - record the axis’ current position in the part program’s
setup screens.

See Setting Jog Unit Parameters, on page 1 - 18 for instructions on


setting the Jog Unit parameters.

Machine Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-110 Machine and Console Basics 1-17
Use a Jog Unit to manually jog the axes:

1. Select an axis with the Axis Select Switch.


2. Use the Jog Feed Keys:
a. Jog axis direction by select either + or – .
b. Use the Jog Feed Override to override the programmed axis feedrate.
OR

Use the Hand Wheel Multiplier:

a. Select a hand wheel resolution with one of the Hand Wheel Multiplier Keys
b. Rotate the Jog Hand Wheel to jog axis direction.

Setting Jog Unit Parameters

To access the parameters :

1. Press the Manual Mode console key to display the Manual screen.
2. Press the Manual Function (F2) softkey. The Jog Unit parameters are
displayed:
• Manual Jog Feed - enter the desired manual jog axis feedrate. The
range is from 0.0 to the machine’s maximum feedrate.
An axis may have a maximum jog feedrate slower than other axes. This
slower axis can only move at its maximum jog feedrate (and not the
higher feedrate of other axes).

For example, the X and Y axes on a machine each have a maximum jog
feedrate of 787 inches per minute (ipm). The Z axis has a maximum jog
feedrate of 100 ipm. Without using the jog feedrate override, the X and Y
axes can jog at 787 ipm , but the Z axis is limited at 100 ipm.

• Manual Spindle Speed - enter the spindle speed when the Spindle On
console key is pressed. This value can not be greater than the machine’s
maximum spindle speed. Entering a negative value (e.g., -500) causes
the spindle to reverse (turn counterclockwise) at that speed.

1 - 18 Machine and Console Basics 704-0116-110 Machine Getting Started with WinMax Mill
Machine Control
Machine Control buttons start and stop machine operation. The buttons function as
follows:

• Power On - enables the relay control system. This button must be


illuminated to operate the machine, but may be switched off while creating or
editing a part program.
• Start Cycle - activates machine operation. When the machine is in an active
mode, the Start Cycle flashes to indicate the machine is ready. When this
button is pressed again, the light switches off.

To turn Control Power On:

1. Press the Power On console button.


2. Press the Manual Mode console key.
3. Press the Start Cycle console button.
Never press the Start Cycle button without knowing exactly what the
machine will do.

• Stop Cycle - stops axes movement, then stops the spindle.


• Feed Hold (Motion Hold on Max console) - stops all axes movement, except
a tap operation, when the tool is in the programmed feedrate region. Pressing
the button a second time allows machine positioning to resume.

To Stop an Automatic Machine Operation:

Press the Stop Cycle button to stop the axis, then the spindle.

Or

1. Press the Feed Hold (or Motion Hold) console button to stop axis motion.
2. Press the Spindle Off console key to stop the spindle.
3. Press the Feed Hold (or Motion Hold) console button again.

Machine Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-110 Machine and Console Basics 1-19
Machine Operations Keys
The Machine Operations console keys are needed to run part programs and control the
machine during cutting. These keys are labeled under the Machine Mode, Spindle, Tool
Changer, and Coolant groupings.

Machine Mode
The Machine Mode console keys have these functions:

• Auto - allows you to run a part program automatically. See Auto Mode, on
page 4 - 55 for more information.
• Interrupt - halts machine operation during automatic execution of a
program to allow manual functions, such as cleaning the work piece. See
Stop Motion, on page 1 - 20 for more information. Press Auto or Single to
resume the part program and most cycles that were manually started by the
operator (such as Chip Auger or Conveyor).
• Single - provides access to the Single Cycle screen. In this mode, the
machine stops the axes after each automatic operation. Pressing the flashing
Start Cycle button causes the automatic machining operation to resume. For
information on the Single Cycle screen softkeys, see the Auto Mode, on page
4 - 55 section. The softkeys are the same on both screens.
• Test - provides access to perform a program test run to identify potential
problems before cutting the part. For more information, see Auto Mode, on
page 4 - 55.
• Manual - provides access to manual machine operations that allow axis
positioning with the jog unit. See Manual Mode, on page 4 - 58 for more
information.

Stop Motion

If you observe a problem during the cutting process or simply want to stop the machine
to make some adjustments, you may press one of three buttons to stop motion:

• Feed Hold—stops all axes movement (except a tapping operation in


progress), when the tool is in the programmed feedrate region. Pressing the
button a second time allows machine positioning to resume without loss of
position, provided no other button or key has been pressed.
• Interrupt Cycle—halts machine operation during automatic execution of a
program to allow manual functions such as cleaning the work piece. Pressing
the Interrupt button performs the following actions:
1. Stops all motion except the spindle.
2. Pulls the tool straight up and out of the part.
3. Stops the spindle.
4. Displays the manual screen on the console.

To restart the part program, press the Auto button followed by the Start Cycle button.

If any key other than the Auto button is pressed to restart the
program, the system cancels the execution of the part program.

1 - 20 Machine and Console Basics 704-0116-110 Machine Getting Started with WinMax Mill
• Emergency Stop—all motion stops and power is shut off to the spindle,
relay control, and servo systems. An emergency stop message with recovery
instructions appears at the bottom of the text screen. To release an
Emergency Stop button, twist the button in the direction indicated by the
arrows and pull the button up.
After the last choice is selected, the following sequence occurs:

1. A prompt is displayed to press the Start button while the


console Start Cycle button flashes.
2. When the Start Cycle button is pressed, the program
begins running at the specified point of the Start Block.
3. When the specified End Block is reached, the display
indicates that Recovery Restart mode is complete and the
Start Cycle button flashes again.
4. If the Start Cycle button is pressed again, then the
program will rerun using the same Start and End Blocks.

Spindle
• On—activates the spindle if the machine is in manual mode. The Start Cycle
button must also be pushed to start spindle rotation.
• Off—stops spindle rotation during manual operation if the Spindle On button
was previously pressed.

Tool Changer
• Auto—activates the automatic tool changing function. When selected, all
operator-initiated tool changes will be automatic.
• Manual—activates the manual tool changing function. When selected, all
tools must be manually inserted into or removed from the spindle; bypassing
the automatic tool changer.

Coolant
• Auto—activates the selected coolant to spray whenever the tool is below the
Retract Clearance plane. The coolant turns off when the tool moves above
the Retract Clearance plane, or during a tool change. This key cannot be
activated in Manual mode. Pressing this key a second time turns off the
coolant operation.
• Primary—functions only on machines equipped with a primary (i.e., flood)
coolant system. Activates the primary coolant system when the machine is in
Auto or Manual mode, and overrides an Coolant Auto operation. Pressing the
Primary key a second time turns off this operation.
• Secondary—functions only on machines equipped with a secondary coolant
system (e.g., Coolant Through Spindle, CTS). Activates the secondary coolant
system when the machine is in Auto or Manual mode and overrides Coolant
Auto operation. Pressing the Secondary key a second time turns off this
operation.

Machine Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-110 Machine and Console Basics 1-21
Communications Panel
All communication ports are located on the Comm Port panel assembly on machine
control cabinet. The following connectors are available:

Port Connector Type Use

10-base T RJ45 Network (Ethernet)

Indexer 8-pin military Indexer

PORT 1 and Port 2 9-pin RS-232C Serial Communications

USB USB jump drive Not available for use.

The communication ports are typically arranged as follows:

Figure 1–14. Communications Panel

RS-232C Serial Port

The RS-232C serial ports can be used to connect peripherals to the machine. These ports
may be addressed separately. The standard baud rates are software-selectable. The ports
can be used as an output or input, depending upon the software.

The connector pin designated for the RS-232C signal is shown below:

Figure 1–15. Male 9-Pin D-Type Connector

While the signals present at the serial port conforms to the RS-232C standard, not all
standard RS-232C signals are available. Some peripheral devices may provide RS-232C
control signals that are not available at the port described here. However, such devices

1 - 22 Machine and Console Basics 704-0116-110 Machine Getting Started with WinMax Mill
can usually be adapted to the port. In some cases, it may be necessary to add jumpers to
the connector. Signals available at the serial port are:

Pin Signal Name Signal on the Pin


1 Data Carrier Detect (DCD) Not used by the control.
Receive Data (RXD) Data received (by machine) in serial format from
2
peripheral device.
Transmit Data (TXD) Data transmitted (by machine) to peripheral
3
device in serial format.
4 Data Terminal Ready (DTR) Not used by the control.
Signal Ground (SG) Line establishing the common ground reference
5
potential for all interface lines.
Data Set Ready (DSR) Signal to notify printer that transmitter is ready
6
for transmission.
Request to Send (RTS) Line used by control to instruct peripheral device
to get ready to receive data. Data can be
7
transmitted after the Clear-To-Send signal is
received from connected peripheral device.
Clear to Send (CTS) Control line used by peripheral device to indicate
8
that it is ready to receive data from machine.
Ring Indicator (RI) Signal indicates modem has received the ring of
9
an incoming call.

To connect a peripheral to the machine, fabricate an adapter cable. If a properly shielded


low capacitance cable is used, cable lengths of up to 100 feet are permissible.

Be certain that you use the correct cabling before connecting the device to the machine.
Consult the peripheral manual to determine whether the peripheral is a Data Terminal
Equipment (DTE) or Data Communication Equipment (DCE) device. The Hurco machine is
a DTE device, and in most cases, so is a personal computer. A printer may be either a DTE
or DCE device.

Indexer Port

Indexing signals are always present at the Indexer port, so there is no need to turn it on.
It is the customer’s responsibility to provide a harness from the Indexer to the Indexer
port. Before making this harness, see the Parts Listing and Diagrams Manual for the
correct pin-outs.

Network Port

The 10baseT (RJ45) connector is used with the Ultinet option. This option requires an
ethernet card, cabling from the ethernet card to the communications panel, and an
optikey diskette to enable the option.

USB Port

The USB Port (Universal Serial Bus) is a high-speed port that allows you to connect
devices, such as printers and jump drives to the panel. You can use a jump drive to
transfer files.

Machine Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-110 Machine and Console Basics 1-23
Automatic Tool Changers
Hurco machining centers use either a Swing-Arm Random Pocket Automatic Tool Changer
(ATC) or a Horizontal Chain Type ATC. Both types of ATCs function essentially the same.

Each tool is inserted into a tool holder before being loaded into the spindle. The
orientation hole in the tool holder must always line up with the orientation key in the tool
changer. Tool changer stations are numbered to identify and locate each tool.

Only use tools that are dimensioned for the maximum spindle speed.

Loading a Tool into the Spindle


Use this procedure to manually load a tool into the spindle:

1. Press the Machine Mode Manual console key to prevent the ATC from moving
while you insert a tool. The Manual screen appears.
2. Touch the Orient Spindle softkey to position the spindle for tool insertion. If
there is a tool in the spindle, refer to Removing Tools from the ATC Magazine,
on page 1 - 26.
On some machines the Y-axis moves to the front of the machine for
manual tool changes.

3. Insert the tool holder into the spindle. Make sure the tool holder slots align
with the spindle head guides.
4. Release the Spindle Unclamp button to secure the tool in the spindle. Be
certain that the tool is firmly seated.
5. Touch the Tool In Spindle softkey. The Tool In Spindle field appears.
6. Make sure the tool number in the Tool In Spindle field matches the number of
the tool in the spindle. If the numbers do not match, enter the correct tool
number.
7. To load a tool into the ATC magazine, see the Loading Tools into the ATC
Magazine, on page 1 - 25 section.

Unloading a Tool from the Spindle


To manually remove a tool from the spindle, follow these steps:

1. Press the Manual Mode console key. The Manual screen appears.
2. Hold the tool to prevent it from dropping.
3. Press the Spindle Unclamp button. The spindle unclamp button is either on the
side of the spindle, or the front of the spindle. Refer to Parts Listing and Wiring
Diagrams Manual for your machine for a drawing showing the Spindle Unclamp
button location.
4. The tool disengages. Pull the tool out of the spindle.
5. Release the Spindle Unclamp button when the tool is free.

1 - 24 Machine and Console Basics 704-0116-110 Machine Getting Started with WinMax Mill
Loading Tools into the ATC Magazine
The ATC takes a tool from the spindle and automatically loads it into the magazine, if
space allows. The tool’s location in the magazine is recorded in the ATC Map (the
Horizontal Chain Type ATC does not use an ATC Map). Before loading a tool into the ATC
magazine, the Servo power must be On, and the machine must be calibrated.

Do not manually load tools directly into the magazine.

To load the tool currently in the spindle into the ATC magazine:

1. Press the Manual Mode console key.


2. Touch the Tool In Spindle softkey. The Tool in Spindle, Next Tool, and ATC Map
(Swing-Arm Random Pocket ATC only) fields appear. For more information
about the ATC Map, see “The ATC Map” section.
3. Verify that the Tool In Spindle value matches the tool currently in the spindle.
If the numbers do not match, enter the correct tool number.
4. Enter the same tool number into the Next Tool field.
5. Press the Tool Changer Auto console key.
6. Enter a new tool number into the Next Tool field. The ATC Map field must be
Auto.
7. Press the Tool Changer Auto console key. The Start Cycle light begins flashing.
8. Clear the tool changer and shut the enclosure door. Press the Start Cycle
button. The Tool In Spindle field will be updated to the next tool value.
• If the Next Tool is an Auto tool, it was placed into the magazine when the
previous tool was removed from the spindle.
• If the Next Tool is a Manual tool, you will be prompted to insert it into the
spindle.

Machine Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-110 Machine and Console Basics 1-25
Removing Tools from the ATC Magazine
Remove tools from the ATC magazine by following these steps:

1. Press the Manual Mode console key.


2. Touch the Tool In Spindle softkey to access the Tool In Spindle screen. If there
is no tool in the spindle, set the Tool In Spindle field to 0 (zero).
The ATC Map field will indicate if the tool selected is in the magazine,
and its location.

3. Enter the tool number (of the tool you want to remove in the magazine) into
the Next Tool field.
4. Press the Tool Changer Auto console key to move the Next Tool into the
spindle.
5. Clear the tool changer area and shut the enclosure door. Press the Start Cycle
button to initiate the tool change.
6. Press the Spindle Unclamp button and manually remove the tool from the
spindle.
7. Repeat steps 2 through 6, as needed, to remove additional tools from the ATC
magazine.

Large Tools in the ATC Magazine


A part program may require tools with large diameters. These tools can be manually
loaded by the operator, or automatically loaded.

The ATC magazine capacity is reduced by half for tools larger than 80
mm (125 mm for some machines).

Follow these steps to load large tools into the ATC magazine:

1. Touch the ATC Map softkey from the Tool In Spindle screen. The ATC Map
appears. See “The ATC Map” section for more information.
2. Touch the Max. Tool Dia. More than XX mm softkey.
3. An “ATC Map will be cleared! Are you sure you want to change Max. Tool
Diameter to more than XX mm?” message appears.
Each time you switch between large and small tools, the entire ATC
Map will be cleared and the magazine must be reloaded.

4. Select the Yes softkey. The ATC Map will clear, then reappear. Only the odd
numbered tool pockets will be available.
5. Reload tools into the magazine using the “Loading a Tool into the Spindle”
section.
6. Return to the default setting of Maximum Tool Diameter XX mm or Less by
using the previous procedure and touching the Max. Tool Dia. XX mm or Less
softkey.

1 - 26 Machine and Console Basics 704-0116-110 Machine Getting Started with WinMax Mill
Machine Start Up
Calibrate Machine
Calibrating establishes the machine reference point (absolute zero) for each axis.
Absolute zero is the location on the table, usually a corner or near a corner, where the X
and Y axes intersect. This value does not change.

To calibrate the machine, press the Manual Mode console button. "Uncalibrated" will be in
the Cal Status field.

Establishing Servo Power


Perform the following steps to establish servo power:

1. If necessary, release all Emergency Stop buttons. Twist the button in the
direction indicated by the arrows to release it.
2. Press the Manual Mode console button.
3. Press the console Power On button to turn on the machine. The Power On
button lights up.
4. If there is a servo or spindle error, press the Reset Servos and Spindle softkey
to clear it. The Start Cycle button begins flashing.
5. Press the Start Cycle button to turn on the machine servos. The Start Cycle
button stops flashing.

Axes Calibration
To calibrate all axes, follow these steps:

1. Press the Calibrate Machine softkey. The Start Cycle button begins to flash off
and on.
2. Press the flashing Start Cycle button. The Axis Limit Switches field indicates
the current status of the machining center’s limit switches as each axis
calibrates.
3. The machine position display (at the top of the text screen) shows zero (0) for
all axes when the calibration process is complete.

Warm Up Machine
If the machine has been idle for an hour or more, it is recommended that the warm up
cycle be run. Warming up an idle machine before part cutting improves component
reliability and machine performance. You must be in Manual mode to run a warm up
cycle.

Follow these steps to warm up the machining center:

1. The control power must be on and the axes must be calibrated. There must
not be any tool in the spindle, and the Tool in Spindle field on the Manual
screen must be 0.

Machine Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-110 Machine and Console Basics 1-27
2. Select the Warm Up Machine softkey. The Start Cycle button begins flashing.
3. Press the Start Cycle button (to cancel the warm up cycle, press any Mode
console button or softkey before pressing the Start Cycle button). The axes
slowly move from one end of the machine to the other. The spindle moves at a
low RPM for five minutes.
4. The warm up cycle completes in 15 minutes. The Manual screen reappears and
axis movement stops.

Follow these steps to cancel the warm-up cycle:

1. Press the Feed Hold console button.


2. Press the Spindle Off button.
3. Press the Feed Hold button a second time, or press the Stop Cycle button.

Reset Master
To restart the control (reboot the system) without switching the power to the machine
tool off and back on again, follow these steps:

1. Press the Auxiliary console button. The Auxiliary screen appears.


2. Press the More softkey.
3. Press the Reset Master softkey. The Yes and No softkeys appear. When the
Yes softkey is pressed, the system will reboot. Pressing the No softkey aborts
the reset process.
Be sure to save any part program you’re working on before resetting
the master. In NC Programming, an unsaved part program will be
permanently erased. In Conversational Programming, the part
program will be saved, but any changes made after the last autosave
will be lost.

Recovery and Restart


Restart a part program at almost any point within the program - typically, the point at
which the running program was interrupted.

If the Emergency Stop button was used to stop machining, machine power must be
restored before restarting the program.

To restart the program, follow these steps:

1. Select the console Auto button. The Start Block default is 1, and the End Block
default is the last block of the program.
2. Enter the proper Start Block and, optionally, an End Block if other than the end
of the program.
3. Touch the Recovery Restart softkey.
4. If the Start Block contains multiple choices for restart, then prompts are
displayed to select the proper point of restart.

1 - 28 Machine and Console Basics 704-0116-110 Machine Getting Started with WinMax Mill
Stop Machine Operation
There are three methods to stop machine operation without turning off the power:

• Emergency Stop
• Park machine
• Control Power Off Timer parameter
The methods described here stop machine operation, but do not
shutdown the control. See Shutdown Control, on page 3 - 34 for
more information about shutting down the control.

If the machine will not be used for several days, or the shop has
power surges or blackouts, turn off machine power at the main
power switch, after stopping machine motion and shutting down the
control.

Emergency Stop
To shut down the machining center quickly, press the Emergency Stop button. All motion
stops and power is shut off to the spindle, relay control, way lubrication pumps, and
servo systems.

Do not use Emergency Stop shut down if the machine has a long
table with heavy equipment attached to one end. Instead, park the
machine so that the weight of the table and any attached equipment
will be evenly distributed.

Before hitting the Emergency Stop button, park the machine or


center the table.

When the Emergency Stop button is pressed, a special error file is created and saved to
the machine hard drive in a folder called NavESTOP. These files record the machine
conditions at the time the Emergency Stop button is pressed. These files can be retrieved
when necessary for service purposes; refer to Retrieve Log and Diagnostic Files, on page
3 - 37 for more information.

Park Machine
Parking the machine centers the table and places the spindle at the home position. Table
and attached equipment weight is distributed evenly when the machine is parked. Before
parking the machine, the servo power must be on, the machine must be calibrated and
the Tool in Spindle must be 0.

Follow this procedure to park the machine:

1. Press the Manual Mode console button.


2. Select the PARK MACHINE softkey. The Start Cycle button flashes.
3. Press the Start Cycle button. The machine moves to its park position.
4. A message with instructions to return to the power-up condition is displayed.

Machine Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-110 Machine and Console Basics 1-29
Control Power Off Timer
Set the Control Power Off Timer on the Machine Parameters screen. All motion stops and
power is shut off to the spindle, relay control, way lubrication pumps, and servo systems.

Where can we go from here?

To restart the machine after the Emergency Stop was pressed, follow
this sequence:

1. Twist the Emergency Stop button to release it.


2. Press the Manual Machine Mode button.
3. Press the Power On button.
4. Press the Start Cycle button.
Or...

To restart the machine after it was parked, follow this sequence:

1. Press the Manual Machine Mode button.


2. Press the Power On button.
3. Press the Start Cycle button.
Or...

If machine will not be used for several days or power surges and
blackouts are common, switch off the machine’s power. After
restarting, calibrate and warm up the machine.

1 - 30 Machine and Console Basics 704-0116-110 Machine Getting Started with WinMax Mill
PROGRAM MANAGER
These topics are discussed in this section:

Managing Program Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 1


Program Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 4
Disk Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 5
FTP Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 6

Managing Program Files


Program Manager shows all part programs that are in the control’s memory to edit or run.
Use the Program Manager menu to create, open, save, and close programs. Features of
the Program Manager include:

• Ability to load more than one program at a time.


• Ability to load Conversational and NC programs at the same time.
• Ability to copy blocks from one program into another (blocks are copied in
Program Review; Program Manager is used to switch between programs to
facilitate copy and paste).

Program in use lock


Unsaved programs
Program storage location

List of programs

Snapshot of part

File type
and description

Figure 2–1. WinMax Program Manager

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-110 Program Manager 2-1


Sort the program list by Program Name or Path by selecting the
corresponding header. Select the Program Name header once to sort
the list alphabetically. Select the Program Name header again and
sort the list in reverse alphabetical order.

Program Manager softkeys are:

• NEW F1—creates a new part program. Choose the program type by selecting
one of these softkeys:
• CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAM F1—creates a new conversational part
program.
• NC PROGRAM F2—creates a new NC part program (extensions for NC
part programs are determined by the NC dialect set in User Preferences,
.FNC for Industry Standard and . HNC for Basic NC.).

WinMax gives new programs the default name NONAME (for


example, NONAME1.HWM). When new programs are created, they
should be renamed with a suitable name and be saved to the hard
drive or other media.

• OPEN F2—opens a part program that is saved to the hard drive, network
drive, floppy disk, or USB memory device. The Load Program screen opens,
where you can locate the program from the list, as in the following example:

3. Select to
open
1. Select folder

2. Select
program
file

Figure 2–2. Load Program screen

To find a program, navigate through the folders in the left pane by selecting
“+” or “-” to expand or collapse. Select a folder to view its contents in the
right pane.

• Load F1—opens an HWM file or an XML1 file.


• Import F2—opens an HD3 file.

2 - 2 Program Manager 704-0116-110 Getting Started with WinMax Mill


HD3 and XML1 files will be listed with .HWM extension in Program
Manager. HWM is Hurco’s conversational program file type. SAVE AS
must be used to resave the program as HD3. Using SAVE will save
the program with the HWM extension. Programs cannot be saved
with the XML1 extension.
Sort the program list by File, Size, or Date by selecting the
corresponding header. Programs with the same date will be sorted
alphabetically.

Select the File header once to sort the list alphabetically. Select the
File header again to sort the list in reverse alphabetical order.

• SAVE F3—saves the current part program to a hard drive, network drive,
floppy disk, or USB memory device. If the program has a path indicated in
Program Manager, it will be saved to the same location.

Hurco recommends the following storage areas in My Computer:

• 3½ Floppy (A:)
• PART_PROGS (D:)
• USB Device (E:)
• My Network Places (if the UltiNet option is installed)
Programs cannot be saved to the root level of the My Computer or
My Documents directories. You must open these to see the directory
listing before you can save to these areas.

• SAVE AS F4—allows the current part program to be saved with a different


name, as a different file type, or in a different location. Also used to save files
with the default NONAME program name. Type the program name in the File
Name box and select the file type, as in the following example:

To rename a program, highlight the entire name in the FILE NAME field and
type or use alpha/numeric console keys to replace the name. To modify
character(s) in the name, highlight the name, select again in the field, and
use the cursor keys, delete, and the alpha/numeric keys to change the name.
When the filename is completely highlighted, the filename extension does not
have to be re-entered; the extension selected in the SAVE AS TYPE field will
be added to the name entered in the FILE NAME field.

For Conversational programs, the following file types are available from the
Save As Type drop-down list:

• .HWM—WinMax Mill conversational format


• .HD5—WinMax Desktop conversational format (desktop only)
• .HD3—Ultimax conversational format

To save as an HWM file, select the SAVE F1 softkey.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-110 Program Manager 2-3


To save as an HD3 (or HD5) file, select the EXPORT F2 softkey.

For NC programs, SAVE AS will default extensions to the selected NC dialect,


either FNC or HNC. If another extension is desired, include the extension with
the filename in the FILE NAME field. For example, SAMPLE. NC.

• CLOSE F5—opens a menu to close selected program or all programs.


• Program Properties F6—stores properties for the selected part program.
• Disk Operations F7—opens the Disk Operations screen to browse available
folders and files, and cut, copy, paste, rename, and delete files.
• FTP Manager F8—displays external network connections (with the Ultinet
option).

Program Properties
Program properties stores and manages properties for the selected part program.

Fields are:

• DISPLAY UNITS—the unit of measurement (inches or millimeters) used


throughout part programming (this field does not apply to NC programs).
These units will be used when the part program is loaded into memory but
the display value can be changed using the unit (IN or MM) icon in the status
bar.
• NAME—the file name of the part program. This field appears as read-only.
• PATH—the media and directory path to the saved program. This field
appears as read-only.
• MATERIAL—the material to be used, if specified (optional). This field
appears as read-only; however, the material can be changed with the
CHANGE MATERIAL F3 softkey. See Tool and Material Database, on page 4 -
37 for more information.
• DESCRIPTION—a short text description of the part program.
• PROGRAM TYPE—specifies the type of program. Use the drop-down list to
change the program type in this field. Program type may be changed for an
exisiting program, and any incompatible data blocks or part setup data is
removed from the program.
The default Conversational Program Type can be set in Coversational
Settings, see Conversational Settings, on page 3 - 5 for more information.

• WRITE PROTECTION—prevents changes to the program from being saved


when set to ON. Changes can be made if set to OFF.

A write-protected program can be saved with a different program


name. The user will be prompted to do this when attempting to save.

2 - 4 Program Manager 704-0116-110 Getting Started with WinMax Mill


Disk Operations
Disk Operations displays available directories and files. Cut, copy, paste, rename, and
delete program files from Disk Operations.

See also:

Import Functions, on page 4 - 48

NC States, on page 4 - 48

Retrieve Log and Diagnostic Files, on page 3 - 37

Directory Window Files Window

Figure 2–3. Disk Operations

When a directory is highlighted in the Directory window, the softkeys are:

• CUT DIRECTORY F1—deletes the directory from one location to be pasted


into another location
• COPY DIRECTORY F2—makes a copy of the directory (but does not delete)
to be pasted into another location
• PASTE INTO DIRECTORY F3—pastes the directory or file that has been cut
or copied. For example, to copy a directory and paste it into a new location:
1. Highlight the directory you wish to copy.
2. Select the COPY DIRECTORY F2 softkey.
3. Highlight the folder in which you wish to place the copied directory.
4. Select the PASTE INTO DIRECTORY F3 softkey.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-110 Program Manager 2-5


• CREATE DIRECTORY F4—creates a new directory
• RENAME DIRECTORY F5—renames a directory
• DELETE DIRECTORY F6—removes the directory
• FTP MANAGER F7—displays the external network connections (with Ultinet
option)

When a file is highlighted in the Files Window, the softkeys are:

• CUT F1—deletes the file from one location to be pasted into another location
• COPY F2—makes a copy of the file (but does not delete) to be pasted into
another location
• PASTE F3—pastes the file that has been cut or copied. For example, to copy
a file and paste it into a new location:
1. Highlight the file you wish to copy.
2. Select the COPY F2 softkey.
3. Highlight the folder in which you wish to place the copied file.
4. Select the PASTE F3 softkey.
• RENAME F4—renames the file
• DELETE F5—removes the file
• LOAD F6—loads the file into the Program Manager
• FTP MANAGER F7—displays the external network connections (with Ultinet
option)

FTP Manager
FTP Manager allows you to transfer programs from a remote location (host), such as a PC
or machine, to a local PC or another machine. To use FTP Manager follow these steps:

1. Set up a connection between your machine and a host.


2. Connect to the remote location.
3. Manipulate files/folders between your machine and the host.
4. Disconnect from the host.
5. Use Program Manager, on page 2 - 1 to access the copied file.

After you have connected to a host:

• Select the FTP Manager softkey to cut, copy, create and delete files/folders to
which you have access on the host computer.
• Select the File Manager softkey to cut, copy, create and delete files/folders on
the local PC or machine.

2 - 6 Program Manager 704-0116-110 Getting Started with WinMax Mill


FTP Host List
This screen displays all the remote locations (hosts) to which you can connect. The
following softkeys are available:

• CONNECT—connect to the selected host. This softkey will be grayed out if


you are already connected.
• DISCONNECT— disconnect from the selected host. This softkey will be
grayed out if you are not connected.
• Add Host—selecting this softkey takes you to the FTP Host Properties screen
and allows you to add a host.
• Edit Host—edit the properties of the selected host.
• DELETE HOST—remove the selected host from the FTP Host List.

FTP Host Properties


This screen displays the properties of the remote location (host). The following fields are
available:

• ALIAS—the name you want displayed in the host list. Choose a meaningful
name to distinguish the host.
• IP ADDRESS—the IP address of the host.
• USERNAME—the name of the user. Access is determined by the FTP server’s
settings. Usually, access to the data drive is given to the "anonymous" login.
Most servers assume a password is not needed for an anonymous login, but
that may not be always be the case.
• PASSWORD—the password required when connecting to the host. The
password must be a minimum of 0 characters and a maximum of 10
characters. If you do not want to require a password, the username should be
anonymous.
• DEFAULT REMOTE DIRECTORY—the directory on the host you want to
access. You can only enter the part of the path to which the server allows you
access (e.g., you won’t be able to access C:\Payroll if the server only allows
you access to the D drive. Also, the default remote directory MUST exist.

Leave this field empty. It will automatically populate with the root
directory on the server to which you have access.

• FILENAME FORMAT—choose the format of file names sent from the host
computer:

8.3—file names with eight characters before the period (.) and three
characters for an extension after the period are allowed.

• Long—the complete path to the file, including the drive letter, server
name, folder path, and file name and extension can contain up to 255
characters – however, it will be truncated to the 8.3 format. For example,
LongFilename.txt will be truncated to LongFil_.txt

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-110 Program Manager 2-7


2 - 8 Program Manager 704-0116-110 Getting Started with WinMax Mill
UTILITIES
Utilities are accessed with the Auxiliary console key. Select the Auxiliary console key and
this window with softkey selections appears on the screen:

Figure 1. Auxiliary Screen

Select the Utility Screen softkey to access the Utility screen. These functions are
available and are described in this section:

System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 2
User Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 3
Machine Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 11
Additional Utilities Softkeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 32
Printing Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 32
Integrator Support Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 33
Restart Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 33
Shutdown Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 34
Serial I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 34
Log Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 35

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-110 Utilities 3-1


System Configuration
The SYSTEM CONFIGURATION F1 softkey on the Utilities screen displays machine,
control, and software information. Softkeys on the System Configuration submenu are:

• Display WinMax Configuration F3—changes WinMax configuration


settings.
• Display Machine Specifications F4—changes machine specifications.
• Upgrade Motion Control Firmware F5—upgrades firmware.
• Backup Config & Machine Files F6—copy Configuration and Machine files
to a directory or to a USB memory device or floppy disk.
• Restore Config & Machine Files F7—use saved files to overwrite existing
Configuration and Machine files.

Display WinMax Configuration


The WinMax Configuration screen displays the current full version number of WinMax.
This information is also displayed when you select the DISPLAY SOFTWARE VERSION
softkey. The following softkeys are also available:

• Display Software Options F2—displays the current software options


available for the machining center.
• Display Motion Configuration F3—displays information about the motion
controller configuration.
• Display Ladder Configuration F4—Ladder files bridge communication
between the machine and the software. The current version of the Ladder
files on the machining center, the total number of Ladder files, and any
mismatched Ladder files that may cause a software conflict are displayed.
• Display WRC File Configuration F5—WRC files contain the screen images.
The total number of WRC files and any mismatched WRC files that may cause
a software conflict are displayed.
• Display WinMax IP Address F7—Displays the current IP address of the
CNC.

Display Machine Specifications


Displays specific information about the machining center that was entered during
software/machine installation.

• Machine Class—The physical orientation of the spindle, relative to the table


surface. The possible machine classes are vertical, horizontal, and universal.
• Vertical/Horizontal—The current orientation of the machine. This field will
be vertical for vertical machines and horizontal for horizontal machines. For
universal machines, this field can be either vertical or horizontal.
• Number of Axes Present—The number of axes present on the machining
center.

3 - 2 Utilities 704-0116-110 Getting Started with WinMax Mill


• Machine Hour Meter—The total number of machine hours expended to
date.
• Maximum Spindle Motor Speed—The maximum acceptable speed for the
spindle.
• Maximum Spindle Tool Speed—The maximum acceptable speed for a tool
in the spindle.
• Maximum Rapid Traverse Rate—The maximum rapid traverse rate.
• Maximum Contouring Rate—The maximum feedrate for contouring.
• Minus/Plus X Direction Travel Limit—The maximum and minimum travel
limits for the X axis.
• Minus/Plus Y Direction Travel Limit—The maximum and minimum travel
limits for the Y axis.
• Minus/Plus Z Direction Travel Limit—The maximum and minimum travel
limits for the Z axis.

Backup Config & Machine Files


Backup files can be used to restore corrupted Configuration and Machine files on the hard
drive. Select this softkey and choose the location to copy the files. Backup files can be
copied to any directory on the hard drive or to a USB memory device or floppy diskette.

Restore Config & Machine Files


Select this softkey to use saved Configuration and Machine files to overwrite existing files
stored on the hard drive.

User Preferences
The USER PREFERENCES F2 softkey on the Utilities screen provides access to the
following:

• User Interface Settings, on page 3 - 4


• Conversational Settings, on page 3 - 5
• NC Settings, on page 3 - 5
• Autosave Settings, on page 3 - 6
• Tool Utilities and Settings, on page 3 - 6
• Machine Parameters, on page 3 - 11
• Serial Port Settings, on page 3 - 30
• FTP Server Settings, on page 3 - 31
• WinMax Uptime, on page 3 - 31
• Select Language, on page 3 - 31
• Data Logging Filters, on page 3 - 31

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-110 Utilities 3-3


User Interface Settings
User Interface Settings change the screen display. Fields are:

• APPLICATION FONT SIZE—size of text displayed by the application in lists


(for example, in Program Manager); default is Large. This field is inactive in
WinMax Mill (active in WinMax desktop).
• SOFTKEY MENU POSITION—positions the softkey menu to the right or left
of the screen; default is Right.
• EDIT MODE—select either Ultimax Classic (default) or Windows Dialog. For
example, Ultimax Classic requires the Enter key to change the value of a data
field, while Windows Dialog will accept a number by pressing the Down
arrow.
• ENABLE PROGRAM RESTORE—resets previously loaded programs when
the application is started after a shutdown; default is No.
• SHOW ALL FILE TYPES—view all file extensions when opening files; default
is No (only displays HWM, HD3, HD5, FNC, HNC, and NC file types).
• SCREENSAVER TIMEOUT—set screensaver timeout in minutes (range is 1-
30 minutes); default is 10.
• LIST CONTROL ROWS—select the appearance of list controls; default is
Lines.
• LIST ICON SIZE—changes the size of icons in lists; default is Small.
• WARN BEFORE SAVING IN OLD FORMAT—specify if WinMax should
should warn that information may be lost when saving a program as HD3.
• MAX MEMORY LOAD—controls the amount of system memory that graphics
generation uses. The range is 50% to 100%; default is 85%. Graphics
generation that uses more than the specified memory will be aborted by the
system and an error message will be displayed. Raising the maximum
memory load allows large programs to be drawn.

If Max Memory Load is set to 100%, graphics generation will not


abort even if all system memory is being used to draw a graphic.

3 - 4 Utilities 704-0116-110 Getting Started with WinMax Mill


Conversational Settings
Conversational Settings fields are:

• MATH ASSIST STYLE—select either Ultimax Classic or Standard Calculator


interface to be used when editing data fields.
Ultimax Classic Math Assist—select operation (=,-,*,/), then number,
and then Enter. For example, if the number 5 is displayed as a value,
pressing “+” and the number 3 will change the value to 8.

Standard Calculator—select number, then operation (=,-,*,/), then


Enter. For example, if the number 5 is displayed as a value, pressing 3
and “+” will change the value to 8.

• DEFAULT CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAM TYPE—select the default


program type when creating new Conversational programs.
• HD3 SAVE PROGRAM TYPE—select the program type used when exporting
conversational programs to the HD3 file format.

Choices for HWM and HD3 Program Types are:

Standard = 3-axis

Rotary A or Rotary B = 4-axis

Rotary A, Tilt B, or Tilt A, Rotary C = 5-axis

NC Settings
NC Settings fields are:

• NC DIALECT—select Basic or Industry Standard NC.


• NC DISPLAY TYPE—select axes data:

Standard = 3-axis

Rotary A or Rotary B = 4-axis

Rotary A, Tilt B or Tilt A, Rotary C = 5-axis

• EXPORTED NC DECIMAL PLACES—indicate the number of decimal places


expressed when exporting a conversational program as NC (range is 1-8);
desktop version only
• BPRNT/DPRNT OUTPUT DEVICE—select where to output BPRINT and
DPRINT formatted data; desktop version only.
• BPRNT/DPRNT OUTPUT FILE—specify the file path if BPRINT and DPRINT
data will be output to a file; desktop version only.
• CUSTOM NC FILE EXTENSION—provide a custom filename extension to
enable loading of NC files that use the extension.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-110 Utilities 3-5


Autosave Settings
Autosave Settings fields are:

• ENABLE AUTOMATIC SAVE—turn Autosave on or off; if Yes, programs are


saved to memory at the time interval specified—it will not save to the source
location of the program.
• SAVE FREQUENCY—specify number of minutes between each autosave;
range is 1-255.
• SAVE ACTIVE PROGRAM ONLY—specify Yes to save only the current
program; specify No to save all loaded programs; default is No.

Tool Utilities and Settings


See also Import and Export, on page 3 - 10.

The Tool Utilities and Settings screen is accessed from Utilities/User Preferences. Fields
vary dependent on whether the Tool and Material Library option is loaded.

With the Tool & Material Library option, fields are:

• Tool Calibration Mode—sets the method used to calibrate tools.


• Zero Calibration—stores the tip of tool dimension relative to home
position (machine zero in z axis). See Zero Calibration Mode, on page 4 -
15 for more information.
• Absolute Tool Length—stores the actual length of the tool from spindle
nose to the tip of tool. See Absolute Tool Length mode, on page 4 - 15 for
more information.
• Automatically Load Unmatched Tools As Manual—automatically loads
unmatched tools from newly-loaded conversational part programs:
• YES—new tools from the newly loaded program (that are not in the Tool &
Material Library) are automatically added to Manual.
• NO—requires new tools to be matched (see “Part Program Tool Review”
section for more information about matching tools.)
• Use Tool Type Checking—only allow the selection of tool types that are
valid for the operation in conversational mode:
• YES—only the tools that are valid for the data block can be selected (i.e.,
drills and taps displayed for hole operations)
• NO—allows any tool to be selected for any data block
• Update Data Blocks With Tool Changes—Update feeds and speeds in
conversational data blocks when tool feeds and speeds are changed.
• Overwrite Existing Zero Calibration—when matching tools during a
program load, the zero calibration from the program replaces the calibration
for the tool on the machine. Default is YES.

3 - 6 Utilities 704-0116-110 Getting Started with WinMax Mill


The OVERWRITE EXISTING ZERO CALIBRATION setting applies both
to tools that are automatically matched (during a program load), as
well as tools that are manually matched.

• Replace In Files—specify if new tool feeds and speeds should be updated in


current editing file only or in all open files
• Tool Matching: Maximum Diameter Difference—the maximum diameter
difference for a tool to be considered a match

Softkeys are:

• Tool Information Printing F6—allows the Tool Library to be printed or


saved to a file
• Import and Export F7—import and export tools to and from the Tool
Library. To move the Tool Library from one machine to another, select
EXPORT.

Without the Tool & Material Library option, fields are:

• Tool Calibration Mode—sets the method used to calibrate tools.


• Zero Calibration—uses Offset Z and Z Table Offset fields to calibrate tool.
See Zero Calibration Mode, on page 4 - 15 for more information.
• Absolute Tool Length—stores the actual length of the tool from spindle
nose to the tip of tool. See Absolute Tool Length mode, on page 4 - 15 for
more information.
• Use Tool Type Checking—only allow the selection of tool types that are
valid for the operation in conversational mode
• YES—only the tools that are valid for the data block can be selected (i.e.,
drills and taps displayed for hole operations)
• NO—allows any tool to be selected for any data block

• Update Data Blocks With Tool Changes—Update feeds and speeds in


conversational data blocks when tool feeds and speeds are changed.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-110 Utilities 3-7


Tool Information Printing
Tool Information Printing is available only with the Tool and Material
Library option.

The TOOL INFORMATION PRINTING F6 softkey on the Tool Utilities and Settings screen
allows you to view and print tool information for all tools saved in the Tool Library:

Print tool list

Save tool list

Tool Information and Printing

Select the PRINT button on the Tool Information pop-up to print a list of tools and
settings, as in the following example:

ATC
Tool Number: 23
Tool Type: Ball End Mill
Tool Diameter is 0.0938 inches.
Tool length is 0.5625 inches.
Length of cut is 0.4688 inches.
Number of flutes is 0 inches.
Direction of Spindle Rotation is Clockwise.
Helix Angle is 0°.
Shank Diameter is 0.0938 inches.
Apt Gear Ratio is 1.
Apt Tool Number is 1.
Apt Diameter Offset is 1.
Apt Length offset is 1.
Simulation Color is SEQUENTIAL.

3 - 8 Utilities 704-0116-110 Getting Started with WinMax Mill


MTC
Tool Number: 1
Tool Type: Drill
Tool Diameter is 0.031 inches.
Tool length is 5 inches.
Length of cut is 5 inches.
Number of flutes is 0 inches.
Direction of Spindle Rotation is Clockwise.
Drill Angle is 118.000000°.
Helix Angle is 0°.
Shank Diameter is 0.031 inches.
Apt Gear Ratio is 1.
Apt Tool Number is 1.
Apt Diameter Offset is 1.
Apt Length offset is 1.
Simulation Color is SEQUENTIAL.

Tool Number: 20
Tool Type: Cutting Tap
Tool Diameter is 0.216 inches.
Tool length is 1.296 inches.
Length of cut is 1.08 inches.
Tap Direction: Right Hand.
Tap Chamfer: Bottoming.
Thread Pitch is 0.0417 inches.
Thread Diameter is 0.216 inches.
Helix Angle is 0°.
Flute Style: Spiral Flute.
Shank Diameter is 0.216 inches.
Apt Gear Ratio is 1.
Apt Tool Number is 1.
Apt Diameter Offset is 1.
Apt Length offset is 1.
Simulation Color is SEQUENTIAL.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-110 Utilities 3-9


Import and Export
Import and Export functions are available only with the Tool and
Material Library option.

The IMPORT AND EXPORT F7 softkey in Tool Utilities and Settings allows you to move tool
information from the WinMax control to other locations and vice versa.

Import and Export submenu softkeys are:

• Export Auto And Manual Tools F1—save Auto and Manual tools to a
different directory.
• Export Manual Tool List F2—save only the Manual tools to a different
directory.
• Import Into Manual Tool List F3—load tools into the control from a
directory. All tools are imported into the Manual list, even if they were
exported as Auto tools (F1).

The ATC positions are not retained when tools are imported.

• Export Tool and Material Database F5—save tool templates and materials
to a different directory.
• Append Tool and Material Database F6—load tool templates and
materials into the control from a directory. These are added to the existing
database on the control.
• Replace Tool and Material Database F7—load tool templates and
materials into the control from a directory. The exisiting database is replaced.

3 - 10 Utilities 704-0116-110 Getting Started with WinMax Mill


Machine Parameters
The Machine Parameters screens list various parameters, the range of values that can be
set for each parameter, and the current set or default value. The values of the Machine
Parameters may be changed by the operator.

The machine, part, and/or tool may be damaged if parameters are


changed without understanding the machine operation that may be
affected by the change.

The fields that will be displayed on the Machine Parameters screens are dependent upon
machine type. The values shown on the following screen figures are the default factory
settings for HTX and VTX series machines.

Follow these steps to access the Machine Parameters screens:

1. Select the AUXILARY console key.


2. Select the Utilities icon.
3. Select the USER PREFERENCES F2 softkey.
4. Select the MACHINE PARAMETERS F6 softkey.

Machine Parameters Page 1

Figure 3–1. Machine Parameters, Page 1

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-110 Utilities 3-11


Machine Parameters - Page 1
Parameter Description Range Default

Coolant Delay Time Sets the time the program pauses 0-60 seconds 0
when the coolant is enabled.

Pulsating or Delay Sets the Washdown Coolant pump run 0 (continuous) 0 or 1


Washdown Enable cycle; used in conjunction with other 1 (pulsating) (depends on
washdown coolant parameters. machine)
2 (delay)

Alt Washdown Dwell Controls washdown coolant flow on the 0-32767 500 or 1000
right side of the machine enclosure on (.01 sec) (depends on
certain machines. Used in conjunction machine)
with other washdown coolant
parameters.

Alt Dwell Lt Side Controls washdown coolant flow on the 0-32767 (.01 200
left side of the machine enclosure on sec)
certain machines. Used in conjunction
with other washdown coolant
parameters.

Alt Washdown Off Sets the time the washdown coolant 0-32767 (.01 0 or 200
Time flow cycle is paused, on certain sec) (depends on
machines. machine)

Washdown On Delay Defines the time the washdown coolant 0-9999 0


Timer pump is on; used with Washdown Off seconds
Delay Timer.

Washdown Off Defines the time the washdown coolant 0-9999 0


Delay Timer pump is off; used with Washdown On seconds
Delay Timer.

Control Power Off Turns the control off after the specified 0-255 120
Time period of inactivity. minutes

Disable Tool Picker Turns off the Tool Picker option. 0 (enable) 0
Option 1 (disable)

Enable Dual Zones Sets a dual-zone capable machine as 0 (1 zone - 1


either a single long bed machine, or as long bed)
a dual zone machine. 1 (dual zones)

3 - 12 Utilities 704-0116-110 Getting Started with WinMax Mill


Coolant Parameters
The coolant parameters are used to control coolant flow to the spindle (known as flood
coolant), coolant flow in the machine enclosure (known as washdown coolant), or to turn
the washdown coolant pump on or off. The Washdown Coolant Pump must be On for Right
and Left side operation. Some coolant parameters may not be functional on your
machine. For examples of how to use washdown coolant parameters on your Hurco
machine, see Table 3–1.Washdown Coolant Parameter Examples, on page 3 - 19.

Washdown coolant flow for VMX24, VMX30, VMX42, VMX50, and VMX60 machines is
continuos to both sides of the enclosure. The amount of washdown coolant used during
machining operations is controlled by cycling the washdown coolant pump.

VMX64 and VMX84 machines are equipped with a butterfly solenoid that alternates
washdown coolant flow between the right and left sides of the machine enclosure.

This is the washdown coolant flow cycle for VMX64 and VMX84 machines:

1. Coolant flows on right side of machine enclosure (defined in Alt Washdown


Dwell).
2. Pause time of no coolant flow (defined in Alt Washdown Off Time).
3. Coolant flows on left side of machine enclosure (defined in Alt Dwell Lt Side).
4. Pause time of no coolant flow (defined in Alt Washdown Off Time).

The amount of washdown coolant used during machining operations for VMX64 and
VMX84 machines is controlled by the time washdown coolant flows/pauses to each side of
the machine enclosure, and/or by cycling the washdown coolant pump.

VMX64 and VMX84 machines are equipped with a separate Factory-configured timer to
control the Y-axis rear way cover washdown on and off cycles.

These coolant parameters are found on Page 1 of Machine Parameters:

• Coolant Delay Time


• Pulsating or Delay Washdown Enable
• Alt Washdown Dwell
• Alt Dwell Lt Side
• Alt Washdown Off Time
• Washdown On Delay Timer
• Washdown Off Delay Timer

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-110 Utilities 3-13


Coolant Delay Time
The Coolant Delay Time parameter pauses the running part program for the indicated
time whenever the program enables the primary or secondary flood coolant. Set the
Coolant Delay Time parameter to pause the program long enough to allow flood coolant
to pump from the coolant tank to the head-mounted nozzles around the spindle before
the tool enters the workpiece.

The default setting for Coolant Delay Time is 0 seconds.

Pulsating or Delay Washdown Enable


This parameter is used with other washdown coolant features to regulate washdown
coolant flow for continuous clearing of chips from the machine enclosure.

Parameter operation is determined by machine type.

• VMX24, VMX30, VMX42, VMX50, VMX60—use this parameter to manage


washdown coolant flow:
• When Pulsating or Delay Washdown Enable = 0, washdown coolant will
continuously flow on the right and left sides of the machine enclosure.
Values in the Alt Washdown Dwell, Alt Dwell Lt Side, or Alt Washdown Off
Time will have no effect on washdown coolant operation.
• When Pulsating or Delay Washdown Enable = 1, do not use this setting
for a VMX24, VMX30, VMX42, VMX50, or VMX60 machine. If unexpected
performance occurs, refer to the Machine Maintenance section of the
Maintenance and Safety Manual.
• When Pulsating or Delay Washdown Enable = 2, the washdown coolant
pump will cycle for the times defined in Washdown Delay On Timer and
Washdown Delay Off Timer.
• The default setting for Pulsating or Delay Washdown Enable is 0.

• VMX64, VMX84—use this parameter to alternate washdown coolant flow on


the machine enclosure:
• When Pulsating or Delay Washdown Enable = 0, do not use this setting
for a VMX64 or VMX84 machine. If unexpected performance occurs, refer
to the Machine Maintenance section of the Maintenance and Safety
Manual.
• When Pulsating or Delay Washdown Enable = 1, washdown coolant flow
will cycle for the times defined in Alt Washdown Dwell, Alt Dwell Lt Side
and Alt Washdown Off Time.
• When Pulsating or Delay Washdown Enable parameter = 2, the washdown
coolant pump will cycle for the times defined in Washdown On Delay
Timer and Washdown Off Delay Timer, whether or not washdown coolant
flow is alternating in the machine enclosure.
• The default setting for Pulsating or Delay Washdown Enable is 1.

Pulsating or Delay Washdown Enable is not functional for HTX500, VM, and VTXU
machines.

3 - 14 Utilities 704-0116-110 Getting Started with WinMax Mill


Alt Washdown Dwell
This parameter controls the time washdown coolant flows on the right side of the machine
enclosure. Alt Washdown Dwell is used with Alt Washdown Off Time to define the
washdown coolant flow cycle on the right side of the machine enclosure. The value for Alt
Washdown Dwell in 0.01 sec increments, so a value of 500 equates to 5 sec.

Pulsating or Delay Washdown Enable must be set to 1 or 2 to use Alt Washdown Dwell.
Parameter operation is determined by machine type.

• VMX24, VMX30, VMX42, VMX50, VMX60


• When Pulsating or Delay Washdown Enable = 1, do not use this setting for
a VMX24, VMX30, VMX42, VMX50 or VMX60 machine. If unexpected
performance occurs, refer to the Machine Maintenance section of the
Maintenance and Safety Manual.
• When Pulsating or Delay Washdown Enable = 2, Alt Washdown Dwell is
not functional; entering a value in Alt Washdown Dwell will have no effect
on washdown coolant flow for a VMX24, VMX30, VMX42, VMX50 or VMX60
machine.
• The default setting for Alt Washdown Dwell is 500 (5 seconds), but set
this parameter to 0 to avoid unexpected performance. If unexpected
performance occurs, refer to the Machine Maintenance section of the
Maintenance and Safety Manual.
• VMX64—When Pulsating or Delay Washdown Enable = 1 or 2, define the
time for washdown coolant to flow on the right side of the machine enclosure.
• The default setting for Alt Washdown Dwell is 500 (5 seconds).

• VMX84—When Pulsating or Delay Washdown Enable = 1 or 2, define the


time for washdown coolant to flow on the right side of the machine enclosure.
• The default setting for Alt Washdown Dwell is 1000 (10 seconds).

Alternating Washdown Dwell is not functional for HTX500, VM, and VTXU machines.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-110 Utilities 3-15


Alt Dwell Lt Side
On VMX60, VMX64, and VMX84 machines, this parameter controls the time washdown
coolant flows on the left side of the machine enclosure. Alt Dwell Lt Side is used with Alt
Washdown Off Time to cycle washdown coolant flow on the left side of the machine
enclosure. The value for Alt Dwell Lt Side is in 0.01 sec increments, so a value of 500
equates to 5 sec.

Pulsating or Delay Washdown Enable must be set to 1 or 2 to use Alt Dwell Lt Side.
Parameter operation is determined by machine type.

• VMX24, VMX30, VMX42, VMX50, VMX60—Alt Dwell Lt Side is not


functional; entering a value in Alt Dwell Lt Side will not affect washdown
coolant flow for a VMX24, VMX30, VMX42, VMX50 or VMX60 machine.

• The default setting for Alt Washdown Dwell is 200 (2 seconds), but you
should set this parameter to 0 to avoid unexpected performance. If
unexpected performance occurs, refer to the Machine Maintenance
section of the Maintenance and Safety Manual.
• VMX64, VMX84—define the time for washdown coolant to flow on the left
side of the machine enclosure.
• Alt Dwell Lt Side will only function if the Alt Washdown Dwell is greater
than 0. If the value of Alt Washdown Dwell is 0, the machine will ignore
Alt Dwell Lt Side and washdown coolant will not flow on either side of the
machine enclosure.
• If Alt Dwell Lt Side = 0 and Alt Washdown Dwell is greater than 0,
washdown coolant will flow to the left side of the enclosure for the time
defined in Alt Washdown Dwell.
• The default setting for Alt Dwell Lt Side is 200 (2 seconds).

Alternating Dwell Left Side is not functional for HTX500, VM, and VTXU machines.

3 - 16 Utilities 704-0116-110 Getting Started with WinMax Mill


Alt Washdown Off Time
On VMX64 and VMX84 machines, this parameter defines the pause time in the washdown
coolant flow cycle. The value is in 0.01 sec increments, so a value of 500 equates to 5
sec.

Pulsating or Delay Washdown Enable must be set to 1 or 2 to use Alt Washdown Off Time.
Parameter operation is determined by machine type.

• VMX24, VMX30, VMX42, VMX50, VMX60 - Alt Washdown Off Time is not
functional; entering a value in Alt Washdown Off Time will not affect
washdown coolant flow for a VMX24, VMX30, VMX42, VMX50 or VMX60
machine.
• The default setting for Alt Washdown Off Time is 0; this parameter is not
functional for a VMX24, VMX30, VMX42, VMX50, or VMX60 machine.
• VMX64, VMX84—When Pulsating or Delay Washdown Enable = 1 or 2,
washdown coolant flow will pause for the time indicated in the Alt Washdown
Off Time after coolant flow on each side of the enclosure.
• If Alt Washdown Off Time is set to 0, the washdown off-time is 0.7 sec.
• The default setting for Alt Washdown Off Time is 200 (2 seconds).

Alternating Washdown Off Time is not functional for HTX500, VM, and VTXU machines.

Washdown On Delay Timer


This parameter defines the time (in seconds) the washdown coolant pump is On, and is
used with the Washdown Off Delay Timer to manage coolant usage. The default setting
for Washdown On Delay Timer is 0 seconds.

Pulsating or Delay Washdown Enable must be set to 2 to use Washdown On Delay Timer.

• VMX24, VMX30, VMX42, VMX50, VMX60—washdown coolant flow will be


continuous to both sides of the machine enclosure during the time the
washdown coolant pump is On.
• VMX64, VMX84—the washdown coolant pump is On for the time defined,
whether or not washdown coolant flow is alternating in the machine
enclosure. Table 3–1.Washdown Coolant Parameter Examples, on page 3 - 19
shows an example where the washdown coolant pump cycles on and off while
washdown coolant flow is alternating on the machine enclosure.

It is recommended that you follow this formula:

Washdown On Delay Timer = Alt Washdown Dwell + Washdown Off


Delay Timer + ALT Dwell Left Side + Washdown Off Delay Timer

See Table 3–1.Washdown Coolant Parameter Examples, on page 3 -


19.

• The default setting for Washdown On Delay Timer is 0 seconds.

This parameter defines the time (in seconds) the washdown coolant pump is On, and is
used with the Washdown Off Delay Timer to manage coolant usage. Washdown On Delay
Timer is not functional for VM machines.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-110 Utilities 3-17


Washdown Off Delay Timer
This parameter defines the time (in seconds) the washdown coolant pump is Off, and is
used with the Washdown On Delay Timer to manage coolant usage. The functionality of
this feature is dependent upon machine type. Washdown Off Delay Timer is not functional
for VM machines.

Pulsating or Delay Washdown Enable must be set to 2 to use this parameter.

• VMX24, VMX30, VMX42, VMX50, VMX60—defines the time the washdown


coolant pump is Off.
• VMX64, VMX84—defines the time the washdown coolant pump is Off,
whether or not coolant flow is alternating in the machine enclosure.

It is recommended that you follow this formula:

Washdown Off Delay Timer = Alt Washdown Dwell + Washdown On


Delay Timer + Alt Dwell Left Side + Washdown On Delay Timer

See Table 3–1.Washdown Coolant Parameter Examples, on page 3 -


19.

Washdown Off Delay Timer should be calculated using even multiples


of its value, increasing it by that value.

For example, if the calculated value is 30, then you can increase it to
60, 90, etc.

• The default setting for Washdown Off Delay Timer is 0 seconds.

3 - 18 Utilities 704-0116-110 Getting Started with WinMax Mill


Examples for Coolant Parameters Use
VMX24, VMX30, VMX42, VMX50, and VMX60
N95 Codes (Integrator Configuration Parameters)
247 228 248 249 297 298 Result
0 0 0 0 0 0 Continuous washdown coolant flow.
1. Washdown coolant pump on for 20 sec.
2 0 0 0 20 45 2. Pump off for 45 sec.
3. Cycle repeats.

VMX64, VMX84
N95 Codes (Integrator Configuration Parameters)
2471 228 248 249 297 298 Result
1. Right side washdown coolant for 8 sec.
2. No coolant for 0.7 sec.
1 800 600 0 0 0 3. Left side washdown coolant for 6 sec.
4. No coolant for 0.7 sec.
5. Cycle repeats.
1. Right side washdown coolant for 8 sec.
2. No coolant for 2.5 sec.
1 800 600 250 0 0 3. Left side washdown coolant for 6 sec.
4. No coolant for 2.5 sec.
5. Cycle repeats.
1. Right side washdown coolant for 10 sec.
2. No coolant for 5 sec.
3. Left side washdown coolant for 10 sec.
4. No coolant for 5 sec.
2 1000 1000 500 30 60
5. Washdown coolant pump on for 30 sec during
right & left cycles.
6. Pump off for 60 sec.
7. Cycle repeats.
1. A value of 3 programmed for N95:247 enables control of the Y-Axis Washdown.

Key to N95 Code Column Headings for Tables Above


Integrator Configuration Definition
Parameter
N95:247 Pulsating or Delay WD Enable
N95:228 Alt WD Dwell
N95:248 Alt Dwell Lt Side
N95:249 Alt WD Off Time
N95:297 WD On Delay Timer
N95:298 WD Off Delay Timer

Table 3–1. Washdown Coolant Parameter Examples

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-110 Utilities 3-19


Control Power Off Time

Turns the control off after the specified period of activity.

The default setting for Control Power Off Time is 120 minutes.

Disable Tool Picker Option


Turns off the Tool Fixture (TPS) option, if it is present on your VM, VMX, or VTXU
machine. Refer to the Tool Fixture (TPS) Option, on page 12 - 1 in Options.

The default setting for Disable Tool Picker Option is 0.

The Disable Tool Picker Option parameter is not functional on HTX500 machines.

Enable Dual Zones


This parameter enables zones on a dual-zone machine. 0 sets both zones as a single long
bed machine, and 1 sets the zones as separate zones. The default is 1.

Machine Parameters Page 2

Figure 3–2. Machine Parameters, HTX500 (left) and VTXU (right), Page 2

3 - 20 Utilities 704-0116-110 Getting Started with WinMax Mill


Machine Parameters - Page 2
Parameter Description Range Default

CAL to LS Velocity Sets the feedrate for the X, Y, or Z axis as 100-2540 1270
X, Y, Z it moves toward the calibration limit MMPM
switch during a machine calibration cycle.
See Cal to LS Velocity Parameters.

CAL to LS Velocity Sets the feedrate for the A, B, or C axis as 100-2540 0


A, B, C it moves toward the calibration limit DPM
switch during a machine calibration cycle.
See Cal to LS Velocity Parameters.

Auto Balance Enable Adjusts the balance between the motion 0 (disable) 1
card and the servo drives at the start of 1 (enable)
calibration and run program.

ATC Disable Disables all automatic tool changer 0 (enable) 0


functions. 1 (disable)

Rapid Override Enables or disables the Rapid Override 0 (enable) 0


Disable potentiometer on the console. 1 (disable)

Tilt Axis Safety Sets the position for the tilt axis during an 0-360 0
Position automatic tool change when the Table degrees
Safety Move parameter is set to Yes for an
Automatic Tool Change.

X-Axis Safety Position Sets the absolute X axis machine location Travel Limits 0
to which the table will move when the (mm)
Table Safety Move parameter is set to Yes
for an Automatic Tool Change. See X-Axis
and Y-Axis Safety Position.

Y-Axis Safety Position Sets the absolute Y axis machine location Travel Limits 0
to which the table will move when the (mm)
Table Safety Move parameter is set to Yes
for an Automatic Tool Change. See X-Axis
and Y-Axis Safety Position.

ATC Z-Axis Move to On HTX500 only, moves the Z-axis to zero 0 (disable) 0
Zero Position position at the end of a tool change. 1 (enable)

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-110 Utilities 3-21


Cal to LS Velocity Parameters
The Cal to LS Velocity parameters set the feed rate for each axis as it is moving towards
the calibration limit switch during a machine calibration cycle. Only the axes that are
present on the machine need to be set. The units are indicated in parentheses and can be
MMPM (millimeters per minute), IPM (inches per minute), or DPM (degrees per minute).

• The default setting for Calibrate to Limit Switch Velocity is 1270 MMPM (50
IPM) for the X, Y, and Z axes. The range for Cal to LS Velocity values for the
X, Y, and Z axes is 100 MMPM to 2540 MMPM.
• The default setting for Calibrate to LS Velocity is 0 DPM for the A, B, and C
axes. The range for Cal to LS Velocity values for the A, B, and C axes is 100
DPM to 2540 DPM.
• The default setting for Calibrate to Limit Switch Velocity is 1270 mmpm (50
IPM) for X, Y, and Z axes.
• The default setting for Calibrate to Limit Switch Velocity is 1000 mmpm
(39.37 IPM) for A axis on a VTXU machine.
• The default setting for Calibrate to Limit Switch Velocity is 2000 (78.74 IPM)
mmpm for B axis on an HTX500 machine.
• The default setting for Calibrate to Limit Switch Velocity is 1000 mmpm (50
IPM) for C axis on a VTXU machine.

Auto Balance Enable


Auto Balance Enable set to 1 will have the logic controller send an auto balance request
to adjust the balance between the motion card and the servo drives at the start of
calibration and run program. No auto balance request will be sent if the parameter is 0.

The default setting for Auto Balance Enable is 1.

ATC and Rapid Override Disable Parameters


ATC Disable
The ATC Disable parameter allows the user to completely disable all automatic tool
change functions. Setting the ATC Disable parameter to 1 disables the Auto Tool Change
button (for performing tool changes in Manual mode or Tool Setup) and the Auto Tool
Change in Auto mode button (for running programs). With ATC Disable set to 1, all tools
will have to be inserted and removed manually using the Spindle Clamp/Unclamp button
mounted on the head.

When ATC is disabled, the Control assumes that the ATC is in a safe
position to allow normal X, Y, and Z axis movement. Input status for
the ATC at home position will not be checked. Failure to ensure that
the ATC is in a safe position may result in machine damage.

The default setting for ATC Disable is 0.

Rapid Override Disable

3 - 22 Utilities 704-0116-110 Getting Started with WinMax Mill


The Rapid Override Disable parameter allows the user to enable or disable the Rapid
Override potentiometer on the console. Rapid Override Disable set to 1 disables the Rapid
Override potentiometer so that all rapid movements in an automatic operation will be at
the programmed setting. Rapid Override Disable set to 0 enables the Rapid Override so
that rapid movements in an automatic operation may be adjusted slower than the
programmed setting.

The default setting for Rapid Override Disable parameter is 0.

Axis Safety Position Parameters


Tilt Axis Safety Position
The Tilt Axis Safety Position parameter sets the position for the tilt axis on the VTXU
machine during an ATC if either one of the following conditions occurs:

• the Move to Safe Pos During TC parameter is set to Yes (for Auto Run mode).
• the Move to Safety Pos Manual Mode ATC parameter (for Manual or Input
modes) is set to 1.

After the Z retracts before the ATC, the tilt axis moves to the position indicated in
degrees. After the automatic tool change completes, the tilt axis returns to the original
position.

The default setting for Tilt Axis Safety Position is 0.

The Tilt Axis Safety Position parameter is not functional for HTX500 machines, VM
machines, or VMX machines.

X-Axis and Y-Axis Safety Position


The X-Axis Safety Position and Y-Axis Safety Position parameters determine the absolute
X-axis and Y-axis machine locations, in millimeters, to which the table will move when the
Table Safety Move parameter is set to Yes for an Automatic Tool Change. See Program
Parameters for more information.During an automatic tool change with the Table Safety
Move set to Yes:

1. The Z-axis will retract to maximum position.


2. The X-axis and Y-axis will move at rapid feedrate to the X-Axis Safety Position
and the Y-Axis Safety Position, respectively.
3. The automatic tool change will complete.
4. The X-axis and Y-axis will move at rapid feedrate to the previous X-axis and Y-
axis positions before the move to the X-Axis and Y-Axis Safety Positions.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-110 Utilities 3-23


The X-Axis Safety Position value must not exceed the minimum or maximum travel limits
for the X-axis. The Y-Axis Safety Position value must not exceed the minimum or
maximum travel limits for the Y-axis. If the Table Safety Move parameter is set to No,
these parameters are not used, and steps 1, 2, and 4 above are not executed for an
automatic tool change.

The default setting for X-Axis Safety Position is 0.000 mm. The default setting for Y-Axis
Safety Position is 0.000 mm.

The X-Axis and Y-Axis Safety Position parameters are not functional for HTX500
machines.

ATC Z-Axis Parameter


ATC Z-Axis Move to Zero Position
This parameter is functional only on an HTX500 machine. The ATC Z-Axis Move to Zero
Position parameter moves the Z-axis to the zero (0) position at the end of either an Auto
or Manual tool change.

ATC Z-Axis Move to Zero Position set to 0 disables the parameter. ATC Z-Axis Move to
Zero Position set to 1 enables the parameter.

The default setting for ATC Z-Axis Move to Zero Position is 0.

ATC Z-Axis Move to Zero Position parameter is not functional for VTXU, VM, or VMX
machines.

Machine Parameters Page 3

Figure 3–3. Machine Parameters, Page 3

3 - 24 Utilities 704-0116-110 Getting Started with WinMax Mill


Machine Parameter - Page 3
Parameter Description Range Default

Aux Output 1, 2, 3, 4 Enables a confirmation signal for 0 (disable 0


Confirmation Enable completion of each Auxiliary M-code 1 (enable)
Output.

Disable Aux Out 1, 2, Disables the specified Auxiliary M-code 0 (enable) 0


3, 4 During Interrupt Output when an Interrupt cycle is selected 1 (disable)
during Auto Run mode.

Move to Safety Pos Manual Mode ATC operations are 0 (disable) 0


Manual Mode ATC performed at Safety Position when 1 (enable)
enabled.

Chip Conveyor On/Off Enables the Chip Conveyor Delay. 0 (disable) 0


Delay Enable 1 (enable)

Chip Conveyor On Sets the time the Chip Conveyor cycles on, 0-9999 0
Delay Time when Chip Conveyor On/Off Delay is seconds
enabled.

Chip Conveyor Off Sets the time the Chip Conveyor cycles off, 0-9999 0
Delay Time when Chip Conveyor On/Off Delay is seconds
enabled.

Aux Output Parameters


Aux Output 1, 2, 3, 4 Confirmation Enable
Aux Output Confirmation Enable set to 1 enables a confirmation signal for completion of
each Auxiliary M-code Output. The program pauses until the confirmation signal is
detected. A setting of 0 will not require a confirmation signal and will not pause the
program during the Auxiliary M-code Output.

The default setting for each Auxiliary Output Confirmation Enable is 0.

Disable Aux Out 1, 2, 3, 4 During Interrupt


When set to 1, the parameter Disable Aux Output During Interrupt disables the specified
Auxiliary M-code Output when an Interrupt cycle is selected during Auto Run mode. Upon
return to Auto Run mode, the Auxiliary M-code Output will automatically be re-enabled.
However, if another mode is selected, then the Auxiliary M-code Output will remain
disabled until activated again in Auto Run mode.

A setting of 0 will leave the Auxiliary M-code Output enabled when an Interrupt cycle is
selected during Auto Run mode. It will remain enabled after exit from Interrupt cycle,
even when accessing a mode other than Auto Run.

The default setting for Disable Aux Out During Interrupt is 0 (enable).

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-110 Utilities 3-25


Move to Safety Pos Manual Mode ATC
When the Move to Safety Post Manual Mode ATC operations parameter is set to 0 for an
ATC command, the Z axis moves to tool change height and the ATC is completed at the
current X and Y axis position.

The default setting for Move to Safety Pos Manual Mode ATC is 0 (disable).

If this parameter is set to 1, then:

1. The Z axis moves at rapid to zero.


2. The X and Y axes move at rapid to the X- and Y-axis safety positions.
3. The Z axis moves to tool change height.
4. The automatic tool change is completed.
5. The Z axis moves to zero.
6. The X and Y axes move at rapid back to the previous X and Y position.

Chip Conveyor Parameters


Chip Conveyor On/Off Delay Enable, Chip Conveyor On Delay Time
and Chip Conveyor Off Delay Time parameters are functional only
when the Chip Removal Forward On/Off F2 softkey (Automatic
Run Mode) is set to On.

Chip Conveyor On/Off Delay Enable


The Chip Conveyor On/Off Delay Enable parameter is used with the Chip Conveyer On
Delay Time and Chip Conveyor Off Delay Time parameters to periodically allow the chip
conveyor or auger to remove chips from inside the machine during the part program.

When Chip Conveyor On/Off Delay Enable is set to 0, this parameter is disabled. Values
entered into the Chip Conveyor On Delay Time and Chip Conveyor Off Delay Time will not
be retained.

When Chip Conveyor On/Off Delay Enable is set to 1, use the Chip Conveyor On Delay
Time and Chip Conveyor Off Delay Time parameters to regulate operation of the chip
conveyor or auger.

The default setting for Chip Conveyor On/Off Delay Enable is 0 (disable).

Chip Conveyor On Delay Time


When the Chip Conveyor On/Off Delay Enable parameter is set to 1, the Chip Conveyor
On Delay Time parameter defines the time that the chip conveyor or auger cycles On to
remove chips from inside the enclosure.

The default setting for Chip Conveyor On Delay Time is 0 seconds.

Chip Conveyor Off Delay Time


When the Chip Conveyor On/Off Delay Enable parameter is set to 1, the Chip Conveyor

3 - 26 Utilities 704-0116-110 Getting Started with WinMax Mill


Off Delay Time parameter sets the time that the chip conveyor or auger cycles Off. When
the chip conveyor or auger cycles Off, the screen status display is FWD-Delay, not
Stopped.

The default setting for Chip Conveyor Off Delay Time is 0 seconds.

Machine Parameters Page 4

Figure 3–4. Machine Parameters, Page 4

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-110 Utilities 3-27


Machine Parameters - Page 4
Parameter Description Range Default

Warm-Up Cycle Time Sets the time for each step of the warm- 60-600 120
Per Pass up cycle.

Warm-Up Starting Sets the spindle speed for the initial step 0-25% 1000
Speed of the warm-up cycle. Max RPM

Warm-Up Speed Sets spindle speed increments for each 0-25% 2000
Steps step of the warm-up cycle. Max RPM

Warm-Up Max Sets the spindle speed for the final step 0-Max RPM Machine’s
Spindle Speed of the warm-up cycle. maximum
spindle RPM

Warm-Up Axis Feed Sets the axis feed rate for each step of 0-Max 2920
Rate the warm-up cycle. Rapid

Disable Auto On Chip Disables chip conveyor from turning on 0-1 0


Removal automatically in AUTO mode.

Axis Feedrate Sets the Axis Feedrate Override Minimum 0-99% 10%
Override Min (%) value.

Axis Feedrate Not accessible by the user. Contact a 101-200 150


Override Max (%) Hurco Certified Service representative for
assistance.

Rapid Feedrate Sets the Rapid Feedrate Override 0-200% 10%


Override Min (%) Minimum value.

Rapid Feedrate Not accessible by the user. Contact a 0-200 100


Override Max (%) Hurco Certified Service representative for
assistance.

Dual Tool Probe Sets tool probe in one or both zones of 0 (one) 0
Present dual-zone machines. 1 (both)

3 - 28 Utilities 704-0116-110 Getting Started with WinMax Mill


Warm Up Parameters
These parameters allow the operator to configure the machine’s daily warm-up cycle.

• Warm-up Cycle Time Per Pass


• Warm-up Starting Speed
• Warm-up Speed Steps
• Warm-up Max Spindle Speed
• Warm-up Axis Feed Rate

The Z-axis is at zero and does not move during the machine warm-
up. Tool In Spindle setting must be 0 before beginning Warm Up
Machine. For the VM1G machine, a tool must be in the spindle before
beginning Warm Up Machine.

When the warm-up cycle is initiated:

• Spindle speeds up to the Warm-up Starting Speed RPM for the time indicated
in the Warm-up Cycle Time per Pass field.
• X and Y axes move diagonally from corner to corner at the Warm-up Axis
Feed Rate.
• The machine then steps through the warm-up cycle until the Warm-up Max
Spindle Speed is reached. The length of each step is defined by the Warm-Up
Cycle Time per Pass. During each step of the cycle, the spindle speed will
increase to the Warm-up Speed Steps RPM and the axes will run at the
Warm-up Axis Feed Rate.

Altering the default daily warm-up parameters may lead to


inadequate machine warm up that can negatively impact spindle
operations and may void the Hurco warranty.

See Machine Warm-up for warm-up cycles for a new spindle or a


machine that was idle 30 days or more.

Disable Auto On Chip Removal


The Disable Auto On Chip Removal parameter disables the chip conveyor from turning on
automatically in Auto Mode. The range is 0 or 1; 0 is the default. Setting the parameter to
1 will disable the Auto On Chip Removal feature.

Axis Feedrate Override Min (%)


Sets the Axis Feedrate Override Minimum value. This value cannot be greater than or equal to
the maximum value.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-110 Utilities 3-29


Rapid Feedrate Override Min (%)
Sets the Rapid Feedrate Override Minimum value. This value cannot be greater than or
equal to the maximum value.

Dual Tool Probe Present


The Dual Tool Probe Present parameter sets tool probe in one or both zones of dual-zone
machines. 0 specifies there is one tool probe; 1 specifies there is a probe in each zone.
The default is 0.

Serial Port Settings


Serial Port Settings allows you to set Port 1 and Port 2 settings for protocol, baud rate,
character length, stop bits, and parity. The following fields appear on the Serial Port
Settings screen. Refer to your hardware documentation for your equipment’s specific
settings.

• Protocol—The format in which the data is communicated. Choose from CTS/


RTS (hardware flow control), Xon/Xoff (software flow control), and Full
Handshake
• Baud Rate—The communication speed rate. Choose a baud rate that is
appropriate for your network from the drop-down list.
• Character Length—The maximum number of bits sent back and forth at one
time.
• Stop Bits—Stop bits signal the end of the transmission of data. Choose the
size for the Stop Bit.
• Parity—Provides simple error checking for the transmitted data.
Select Even if the data bits plus the parity bit result in an even number of 1's

Select Odd if the data bits plus the parity bit result in an odd number of 1’s.

Select None if there is no parity bit included in the transmission. When No is


selected, its assumed that there are other forms of checking that will detect
any errors in transmission.

For example, suppose the data bits 01110001 are transmitted to your
computer. If even parity is selected, then the parity bit is set to 0 by the
transmitting device to produce an even number of 1's. If odd parity is
selected, then the parity bit is set to 1 by the transmitting device to produce
an odd number of 1's.

3 - 30 Utilities 704-0116-110 Getting Started with WinMax Mill


FTP Server Settings
The WinMax console can serve as an FTP Server. The following fields appear on the FTP
Server Settings screen. For more information refer to UltiNet, on page 14 - 1 in Options.

• Enable FTP Server—Enable the WinMax Control to act as an FTP Server.


• FTP Server Port—The port number for FTP access.
• Maximum Idle Time (Mins)—Maximum amount of time before connection
is dropped.
• User Name—The log in name that will allow users access to the FTP Server.
• Password—The password that corresponds to the user name and allows
access to the FTP Server.
• Path—The file path that the users will be allowed access to.

WinMax Uptime
The WinMax Uptime screen displays the start date time and runtime for the current
session of Winmax.

Select Language
Select and register a language on the Language Selection screen:

1. Select an installed language. Languages that have not been installed and
registered are grayed out on the list.
2. Press the SELECT/LOAD F1 softkey to install the Language files. You can also
press the F1 key to perform this function.

Language Registration
To register a new language:

1. Press the REGISTRATION F3 softkey on the Language Selection screen to


register alternate languages and enter map and hlp filenames.
• Define the language to appear on the screen by using the drop-down list
or select a softkey.
• Select the Map filename and HLP filename for the language. WinMax
requires the HLP file for the online Help.
• Select the Register button so the software registers the language
selection.

2. Select EXIT to return to the Language Selection screen.

Data Logging Filters


Used for diagnostic purposes only.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-110 Utilities 3-31


Additional Utilities Softkeys
• Printing Setup F3—set printing preferences for program blocks, range of
program blocks, program parameters, part setup, and tool setup.
• Integrator Support Services F4—for diagnostics and machine
configuration; password required for access.
• Restart Control F5—exits all control operations, powers down, then restarts
machine and control.
• Shutdown Control F6—exits all control operations and powers down
machine.
• Serial I/O F1—to begin read/write program operations using screenport 1
or 2.
• Log Files F2—displays error and status messages that have occurred during
normal operation.

Printing Setup
The Printing Setup F3 softkey on the main Utilities screen provides access to the following
printing functions:

• Part Program Printing F1—print part program elements.


• Tool Information Printing F2—print the Tool Library or save it to file.
• Probing Data Printing F3—print probing part inspection files.

Part Program Printing


In the Part Program Printing screen you can choose to print some or all of the following
elements:

• Program Blocks (all or a range)


• Program Parameters
• Part Setup
• Tool Setup

After checking the desired elements, select the PRINTING F3 softkey. A pop-up window
appears that contains the selected data. The information can be viewed by selecting the
heading to expand the section; select the heading again to hide the information. The
following softkeys appear in the pop-up window:

• Print Preview—displays the part program information as it will appear when


printed.
• Print—sends the information to the printer.
• Save As—saves the information as a text file to an external drive.
• Close—closes the pop-up window.

3 - 32 Utilities 704-0116-110 Getting Started with WinMax Mill


Probing Data Printing
When Probing Part Inspection files are generated, they are saved to the same location
and with the same filename as the part program with a .TXT filename extension. For
example, the Part Inspection file for the program SAMPLE.HWM is SAMPLE.TXT. Part
Inspection files are printed from the control using the PROBING DATA PRINTING softkey:

1. Select the PRINTING SETUP F3 softkey from Utilities.


2. Select the PROBING DATA PRINTING F3 softkey.
3. Locate the Part Inspection file from the Locate Probing Data Files screen.
4. Select the PRINT F1 softkey to print the file.
Subsequent Part Inspection data from the same part program is
appended to the existing Part Inspection file for that program.

Integrator Support Services


The Integrator Support Services screen requires a password to
access and is for Hurco Certified Technicians’ use in configuring and
setting up the machine.

Restart Control
The Restart Control command will remove control power, save all open programs in
Project Manager, complete an orderly shutdown of the WinMax Mill control, and then
restart.

Follow these steps to use the Restart Control command:

1. Press the Aux/Menu key followed by the Utility Screen softkey to access the
Utilities screen and softkey menu.
2. From the Utilities screen, select the Restart Control softkey to access the
Restart Control command. A pop-up message appears: “Do you really want to
restart the control?”
3. Select Yes or No. When Yes is selected, the Restart Control command is
performed. This feature saves time and avoids having to shut down the entire
machine when it is only necessary to restart the control.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-110 Utilities 3-33


Shutdown Control
The Shutdown Control command will remove control power, save all open programs in
Project Manager, and then complete an orderly shutdown of the WinMax control.

Hurco recommends using the Shutdown Control command prior to


turning off machine power to ensure that no data is lost.

1. Follow these steps to use the Shutdown Control command:


2. Press the Aux/Menu key followed by the Utility Screen softkey to access the
Utilities screen and softkey menu.
3. From the Utilities screen, select the Shutdown Control softkey to access the
Shutdown Control command. A pop-up message appears: “Do you really want
to shut down the control?”
4. Select Yes or No. When Yes is selected, the Shutdown Control command is
performed.
5. Wait for the shutdown process to finish before shutting off machine power at
the Main Disconnect switch.

Serial I/O
Two serial ports are available on the control. The Serial I/O screen contains Status and
Bytes Transferred fields for both ports. In addition, there are read, write, and abort
softkeys for both ports.

These are the fields on the Serial I/O screen:

• Status—status of serial port.


• Bytes Transferred—number of bytes transferred.

These softkeys are available on the Serial I/O screen. Duplicate sets of fields and
softkeys are available on the Serial I/O screen for Port 1 and Port 2.

• Begin Reading from Port—brings up 2 softkey choices: READ NC FROM


PORT and READ CONV FROM PORT to identify the program format to read.
• Begin Writing to Port—writes the program to the port.
• Abort Port Operation—halts the read or write operation for the port.

3 - 34 Utilities 704-0116-110 Getting Started with WinMax Mill


Log Files
WinMax provides two log files that are accessed with the Log Files softkey, as well as
status and error listings:

• Active Error Listing, on page 3 - 35


• Active Status Listing, on page 3 - 35
• Error History, on page 3 - 36
• Status History, on page 3 - 36
• Retrieve Log and Diagnostic Files, on page 3 - 37
• Export Log, on page 3 - 37

Active Error Listing


WinMax provides a list of the most recent error messages displayed, up to a maximum of
200 messages. Review messages when troubleshooting or to determine if a problem
recurs.

These are the softkeys on the Active Error Listing screen:

• Previous Page F1—displays the error messages on the previous page of the
Active Error Listing.
• Next Page F2—displays the error messages on the next page of the Active
Error Listing.
• Clear All F4—clears all error messages from the Active Error Listing.

Active Status Listing


The Active Status Listing screen displays current machine status messages. Each item will
include time/date stamp, language file, language file index and the machine status
message currently active in the system. Examples are messages such as “MOTION HOLD
HAS BEEN DEPRESSED,” or “LOW LUBE LEVEL.” As each status changes back to a normal
state, it will be removed from the list (see Status History, on page 3 - 36).

Example:

10:53:39, STATUS.WRC, 32

CHIP DOOR(S) OPEN.

These are the softkeys on the Active Status Listing screen:

• Previous Page F1—displays the status messages on the previous page of


the Active Error Listing.
• Next Page F2—displays the status messages on the next page of the Active
Error Listing.
• Clear All F4—clears all status messages from the Active Status Listing.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-110 Utilities 3-35


Error History
The Error History screen displays a list of all system errors since the last power up (see
Active Error Listing, on page 3 - 35). A plus sign “+” indicates when the error occurred
and a minus sign “-” indicates when the error was cleared.

Examples:

Error occurred:

10:53:40, ERROR.WRC, 110, +

SERVO FAULT – Z AXIS.

Error cleared:

10:57:32, ERROR.WRC, 110, -

SERVO FAULT – Z AXIS.

The history will also display part program errors generated during programming
(interpreter errors). These errors will not display in the Active Error Listing since they are
transient.

Example:

11:39:21, COMPILER.WRC, 3, +

ERROR IN BLOCK 1: TOOL 1 IS AN INVALID TOOL NUMBER.

Status History
The Status History screen displays a list of all system messages since the last power up
(see Active Status Listing, on page 3 - 35). A plus sign “+” indicates when the status
went active and a minus sign “-” indicates when the status returned to normal.

Examples:

Status went active:

10:53:39, STATUS.WRC, 32, +

CHIP DOOR(S) OPEN.

Status returned to normal: Log F

10:54:27, STATUS.WRC, 32, -

CHIP DOOR(S) OPEN.

3 - 36 Utilities 704-0116-110 Getting Started with WinMax Mill


Retrieve Log and Diagnostic Files
When the Retrieve Log and Diagnostic Files softkey is selected, a file manager screen
opens with access to Log and Diagnostic files. Directories are displayed in the left pane;
these include AtcMapLog, Communications, DumpFiles, NavErr, NavTap, NavESTOP,
Profiles, ScreenCaptures, and ThreadMonitor. Select a directory to see its contents (the
files) displayed in the right pane. To help distinguish between files, view the date and
time they were created, which is displayed in the Date column.

When it is necessary to copy certain files for service purposes, follow these steps:

Due to the large size of some of the files, it is recommended to copy


them from the Hurco machine to a USB flash memory device (128M
or larger).

1. Attach the USB flash memory device to the external connector on the
communications port on the machine.
2. Select the appropriate directory from the left-hand pane and select the file(s)
you wish to copy from the right-hand pane.
3. Select the COPY softkey.
4. In the left-hand pane, select the USB flash memory device (will probably
indicate it is E drive in parentheses).
5. Select the PASTE softkey. The files are now on the USB flash memory device,
and can be transferred to a PC to be emailed.

Export Log
The Export Log displays data that is lost or changed when a program is exported from
WinMax (.HWM) to another format (.HD3, .FNC, etc.). Each time a program is exported
from .HWM to another format, the data from the most recent export is displayed and the
older data is erased.

These are the softkeys on the Export Log screen:

• Previous Page F1—displays the previous page if log is longer than one
page.
• Next Page F2—displays the next page if log is longer than one page.
• Clear All F4—erases all information from the Export Log.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-110 Utilities 3-37


3 - 38 Utilities 704-0116-110 Getting Started with WinMax Mill
PROGRAMMING BASICS
The following sections explain basic programming information for Conversational and NC
programming, such as required setup, program checking, editing, and running of the
program.

Input Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 2
Part Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 3
Tool Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 14
Part Program Tool Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 30
Tool Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 35
Tool and Material Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 37
Program Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 38
Import Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 48
Copy and Change Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 50
Review Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 53
Auto Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 55
Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 58
Automatic Tool Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 61
HTX Automatic Pallet Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 72
Manual Safety Override Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 79
Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 82

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-110 Programming Basics 4-1


Input Mode
Input mode is used for part and tool setup, part programming, setting parameters, and
other information entry. Press the Input key on the console to access the Input screen.

The following softkeys appear on the Input screen:

• Import Functions F1—access the Part Setup screen to establish part zero,
centerline, offset Z, safety work region, and other parameters.
• Tool Review F2—access the Tool Review screen for a summary listing of all
tools used in active program (see Part Program Tool Review, on page 4 - 30
for more information).
• Part Programming F3—access and create data blocks of a part program.
The current program's data blocks appear on screen when this softkey is
used. Delete, add, edit, and navigate through the data blocks. The NC editor
is displayed for NC programs.
• Program Parameters F4—access General, Milling, Holes, Probing, and
Performance parameters. NC parameters are accessible for NC programs.
• Import Functions F5—import sections of a previously saved program.
• Copy and Change Blocks F6—make changes to several blocks at one time
and/or copy and change blocks within the active program.
• Erase Functions F7—erase sections of the current program.
• Program Manager F8—access and manage other part programs.

Erase Functions
Erase functions erases (deletes) programs or components (part setup, tool setup, and
program parameters).

New WinMax features are:

• ERASE PART SETUP F1—resets Part Setup to the default values.


• ERASE TOOL SETUP F2—deletes tools in Manual Tools, Auto Tools, and
spindle.
The Erase Tool Setup softkey deletes ALL tools from the control, and
cannot be undone.

• RESET PROGRAM PARAMETERS F3—resets Program Parameters to the


default values.
• ERASE PROGRAM F4—deletes the part program data blocks but retains the
program name.
• UNLOAD PROGRAM F5—removes program from the Program Manager,
including the filename. This does the same function as CLOSE PROGRAM in
the Program Manager.

4 - 2 Programming Basics 704-0116-110 Getting Started with WinMax Mill


Part Setup
See also:

Part Setup Fields, on page 4 - 8

Part Setup Softkeys, on page 4 - 11

Part setup establishes the locations of part zero in X, Y, and Z relative to the machine's
absolute zero. Part Zero may be located anywhere on the fixturing or the part. During
machine calibration, each axis moves to its + or - travel limits. Machine zero, identified
during machine calibration, is the location to which each axis moves to determine a fixed
point where the X, Y, and Z axes become tangent. This value does not change after
calibration.

1 Part Zero

2 Workpiece

3 Machine Zero

4 X Axis

5 Y Axis

Figure 4–1. Part Zero Relative to Machine Zero Viewed Looking Down at Table

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-110 Programming Basics 4-3


Program the axes to move within the coordinate system as shown below:

-X Table moves to the left

+X Table moves to the right

-Y Table moves toward the operator

+Y Table moves away from the operator

-Z Spindle moves down and into the part

+Z Spindle moves up and away from the part

Figure 4–2. Axis Motion

The location of part zero in Z is established during tool calibration. During setup, the tool
zero calibration plane is established for each tool. The program dimensions for a part are
relative to these points, viewed facing the machine, as shown below:

1 Table

2 Part (workpiece)

3 Machine Absolute - Z Axis

4 Tool Zero Calibration Plane

Figure 4–3. Part Zero in Z (Tool Zero Calibration Plane)

Select the Toggle Units softkey to change between inch and metric units of
measurement.

4 - 4 Programming Basics 704-0116-110 Getting Started with WinMax Mill


Part Setup Coordinate Systems
Machine Coordinate System
The Machine Coordinate System is fixed to the machine frame and does not move when
the machine axes move. This coordinate system is located at the spindle nose center
when all machine axes are at their zero positions.

Unrotated Coordinate System


The Unrotated Part Coordinate System is present on a 4-axis or 5-axis machine and is
located at the Workpiece Coordinate system when all the machine’s axes are at their Part
Setup Zero locations. This coordinate system moves with the machine’s linear axes, but
does not rotate with the rotary axes. The Unrotated Coordinate system is generally used
only by NC Post Processors that do not use Tool Center Point Management.

Workpiece Coordinate System


The Workpiece Coordinate System is fixed to the physical workpiece fixtured to the table;
it moves and rotates when the machine axes move.The coordinate system is fixed to the
part fixtured on the machining center’s table. The Workpiece Coordinate System is
typically set in the user’s CAD/CAM system or on the part drawing used for programming
the tool paths.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-110 Programming Basics 4-5


The Machine Coordinate, Workpiece Coordinate, and Unrotated Coordinate systems are
shown in the figure below:

1 Machine Coordinate System

2 Unrotated Part Coordinate System

3 Workpiece Coordinate System

Figure 4–4. Part Setup Coordinate Systems

4 - 6 Programming Basics 704-0116-110 Getting Started with WinMax Mill


5-Axis Part Setup Fields
The Part Setup screen for a 5-axis machine contains these two fields:

• Z Table Offset—directional distance from the C-axis table to the X-Y plane of
the Workpiece Coordinate System, on page 4 - 5. Z Table Offset is positive in
the part setup shown in the figure below.
• Offset Z—directional distance from Zero Calibration (described below) to the
X-Y plane of the Workpiece Coordinate System, on page 4 - 5. Offset Z is
positive in the part setup shown in the figure below.
• Zero Calibration, the tool calibration height, is also used to set up a part on
a 5-axis machine. Zero Calibration is defined on the Tool Setup screen. Zero
Calibration is positive in the part setup shown in the figure below; however, in
the NC Tool Offsets table it is negative.
• Ensure that the B-axis angle is at zero degree when measuring Z
Table Offset, Offset Z, and Zero Calibration fields for 5-axis
machining.
• For conversational programs, B-axis Part Setup Offset must be
zero degree.

1 Workpiece Coordinate System

2 Zero Calibration (positive value)

3 Offset Z (positive value)

4 Z Table Offset (positive value)

Figure 4–5. 5-Axis Part Setup

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-110 Programming Basics 4-7


Part Setup Fields
The Part Setup screen contains these fields:

• Part Zero X / Y—defines the X and Y locations in machine coordinates for


part zero.
• Part Zero A / B /C—defines the A, B, and/or C locations of Rotary
coordinates for part zero.
• A /B /C Centerline X/ Y / Z—defines incremental distances from true part
zero. Program these values in order to draw the program properly on the
Graphics screen.
For rotary programs, Hurco recommends automatically calculating
the rotary centerline. See Rotary Part Setup, on page 6 - 8 for more
information.

• Part Zero Z (Absolute Tool Length Mode)—defines the distance from the
tool calibration plane to the workpiece zero. This field defaults to zero for all
new programs. See Absolute Tool Length mode, on page 4 - 15 for more
information.
• Touch the top of workpiece with the tip of a calibrated tool and select the
Calculate Part Z with Current Tool F6 softkey. The value is automatically
entered into the field as the distance from the touch-off gauge block to
the workpiece.
• To add an offset, add or subtract a value from the Part Zero Z value.

If this field is not set before running a part program, tools will plunge
to the gauge block height.

• Offset Z (Zero Calibration Mode)—defines an offset dimension relative to


the tool’s Zero Calibration value. This field defaults to 0 so that the tool tip of
all calibrated tools will be at the same Z=0 in the program. Offset Z is
combined with all of the program’s tool calibration points and the Z Top and Z
Bottom of the Safety Work Region.
• To use Store Position softkey or button, calibrated tool previously defined
in Tool Setup for this program must be in the spindle.
• Entering a value in the Offset Z field adds or subtracts the amount of the
offset to/from the Tool Calibration value. For example, you can adjust all
Tool Calibration values in the Z axis and Z Start to compensate for part
thickness by changing the Offset Z value without recalibrating each tool.
• The Include Offset Z in Tool Zero Cal parameter indicates if Offset Z is
added to the Zero Calibration value when tool calibration is set using
Store Machine Position. See General Parameters 2, on page 4 - 40 for
more information.

4 - 8 Programming Basics 704-0116-110 Getting Started with WinMax Mill


1 Table

2 Workpiece

3 Reference gauge block

4 Offset Z (Zero Calibration)


Part Zero Z (Absolute Tool Length)

Figure 4–6. Offset Z or Part Zero Z

• Safety Work Region—defines a part-relative safety area to prevent the


cutting tool from colliding with fixtures or other equipment. The Safety Work
Region created in Part Setup is saved with a conversational part program; the
Safety Work Region is not saved with NC programs.
Use the Safety Work Region fields on the Part Setup screen to enter values to
define the safety region. Type the value in the field, or jog each axis to the
desired safety region, and press the Store Position button on the jog unit.

Out of range entries in the Safety Work Region appear in red. See Machine
Specifications for ranges.

Always enter the Z(-) parameter (Z Bottom) to prevent the tool from
drilling through the part and into the table.

Use the Z(+) field (Z Top) to define the clearance above the part and
fixture.

Use the Z(+) field with a Position block. The Z Top value reduces
rapid Z motion for Position blocks. The spindle retracts to the Z Top
value above the tool zero calibration for Position blocks.

The figure below translates these fields into the Safety Work Region:

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-110 Programming Basics 4-9


1 Part Zero

Figure 4–7. Safety Work Region

• Z Table Offset (Zero Calibration Mode)—specifies the part offset in Z


direction relative to the table top.
• X/Y Skew (Deg)—represents, in degrees, how far the part is from perfect
alignment with the table.
• Zone (dual-zone machining)—specifies the zone for dual-zone machines.

Digital Read Out (DRO)


The DRO is displayed at the top of the Part Setup screen (it also appears at the top of the
Tool Setup and Machine Mode screens). The DRO shows the real-time position of the axes
and machine status. The current zone is displayed for dual-zone machines. The Machine
and Part position information in the DRO will not appear if the machine is not calibrated.
These are the DRO fields (fields are dependant on the machine mode displayed) :

• Zone (dual-zone machines only)—displays the current zone.


• Machine and Part Axes—displays the current position of all axes.
• Opt Stop On (Off)—displays the status (on or off) of the Optional Stop for
NC programs.
• Orientation—the orientation of the axes.
• Chip Removal—displays the status of the chip auger.
• Tool in Spindle—displays the tool number of the tool in the spindle.
• Spindle—displays the current spindle speed.
• Feed—displays the current feed rate.
• Program Run Time—displays the time the program has been running.
• F(%)—displays the current Feedrate per Minute percentage set on the axis
Feed Rate knob.
• R(%)—displays the current Rapid Traverse Feedrate percentage set on the
Rapid override knob.
• S(%)—displays the current spindle RPM percentage set on the Spindle
Speed override knob.
• Magazine—indicates the current pocket.
• Axes Status—shows the axes status (calibrated or uncalibrated).

4 - 10 Programming Basics 704-0116-110 Getting Started with WinMax Mill


• Axis Limit Switches—displays the status of the machine’s limit switches as
each axis calibrates.

Part Setup Softkeys


Part Setup contains these softkeys:

• Work Offsets—Accesses the work coordinates G54-G59 and a set of shift


values for NC programs. These are used to set multiple part zeroes for
multiple parts fixtured to the table and milled consecutively using the same
program.
• Tool Setup—Accesses Tool Setup screen to enter the descriptions of tools
that will be used in the part program.
• Part Programming—Accesses fields to enter the exact description of how
the part will be cut.
• Program Parameters—Accesses the Program Parameters screen to specify
data common to all program data blocks.
• Part Probing—Accesses the Probing parameters screen (available only with
the Probing option).
• Store Machine Position—Sets the current axis position as a Part Zero
location. The cursor location determines which axis (X or Y) will be set.

These are the softkeys on the second Part Setup screen, accessed with the More Î
softkey:

• Stock Geometry—Accesses fields to specify the dimensions of the stock


material so it displays properly in graphics.
• Calculate Rotary Offsets—Calculates centerline offsets for rotary
programs.
• Orient Spindle—Allows the spindle to be positioned for tool insertion or
removal.
• Toggle Units—Changes units from metric to imperial and vice versa.

Part Fixturing and Tool Loading


Before entering data into the part and tool setup screens for a part program, first fixture
the work piece to the table and load a tool into the spindle.

In order to determine the starting point (part zero) in the part, first fixture the work piece
(raw material or stock) to the machine tool table. This process, called fixturing, can be
accomplished using a variety of clamping devices, such as vises and toe clamps. Select
the fixturing device that will hold the work piece securely without getting in the way of
the cutting tool while the part is being made.

You may want to insert a tool in the spindle to use as an edge finder when identifying part
zero. Press the Manual button in the Machine Mode grouping to display the Manual
screen. Use the Tool in Spindle field and softkey to enter the tool number for the edge
finder tool.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-110 Programming Basics 4-11


Insert this tool as described in Loading a Tool into the Spindle, on page 1 - 24. The tool
will need to be calibrated as described in Tool Setup, on page 4 - 14.

Work Offsets
When in NC mode, the Work Offsets softkey displays up to six work coordinates (G54-
G59) and a set of shift offset values. These are used to set multiple part zeroes for
multiple parts fixtured to the table and milled consecutively using the same program.

The X, Y, Z, and optional Rotary A and B work offset values can be entered for G54 to
G59 codes. The coordinates defining G54 are the part zero coordinates for the original
part defined on the Part Setup screen. When the G54 coordinates are changed on this
screen, the part setup is also changed.

These work offsets are stored in memory, but not with the part program. They are not
saved to a disk file and need to be re-entered.

The shift offset coordinates, which follow the six work coordinates on the screen, move all
of the part zero coordinates as a group. This incremental value is useful when you place
part fixtures on the table in a different location and want to shift all of the work offsets to
the newly fixtured location. The G54-G59 offset values do not change on the screen when
shift offset values are entered.

For dual-zone machines, specify the zone for each offset:

Set zone for each


work offset

Figure 4–8. Work Offsets on a dual-zone machine

Values for the Zone field are:

• 0—zone undefined (the active zone when only one is in use)


• 1—Zone 1
• 2—Zone 2

Auxiliary Work Offsets

4 - 12 Programming Basics 704-0116-110 Getting Started with WinMax Mill


There are 93 additional X, Y, Z, and optional Rotary A and B work offsets available on the
AUX WORK OFFSETS screen. These are accessed with the Aux Work Offsets F6 softkey
on the WORK OFFSETS screen.

To access any of these offsets call G code G54.1 Pn, where n is 1 thru 93. For example,
to change to auxiliary work offset 46 you would call G54.1 P46 in your NC program.

To update work offset values, use data setting G code G10 L20 Pn to set the Auxiliary
work offsets values. For example, to update work offset 46 value call G10 L20 P46
X12.5 Y3.0 Z-0.5

Following is a sample NC program that uses Auxiliary Work Offsets:

%
G90G80
T1M6F100
G10 L20 P1 X1 Y1 Z.-1
G10 L20 P93 X10 Y10 Z-.1
G54.1 P1 (change work part setup to 1)
G1X0.Y0.Z0.
X1.
Y1.
X0.
Y0.
G54.1 P93 (change work part setup to 93)
G1X0.Y0.Z0.
X1.
Y1.
X0.
Y0.
M02

Stock Geometry
STOCK GEOMETRY F1 allows you to specify the dimensions of the stock material so it
displays properly in graphics (when STOCK OUTLINE is enabled in Graphics Settings).

Fields on the Stock Geometry screen are:

• MANUAL STOCK SIZING—specify if you will manually set the stock


dimensions
• NO—software will automatically size and position the stock. To calculate
this, WinMax takes the diameter of the largest tool in the program and
adds 7/10ths of that size to the stock diameter X and Y fields (with a
minimum addition of .05).
• YES—enter the dimensions manually

• STOCK TYPE—specify BOX or CYLINDER


• BOX—enables settings for X length, Y length, Z length of stock box or

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-110 Programming Basics 4-13


cube
• CYLINDER—enables direction, length, and radius of cylinder
• MANUAL BORDER SIZING—specify if you will manually size the border
(available only when MANUAL STOCK SIZING is set to NO)
• BORDER SIZE—specify stock border dimension (available only when
MANUAL BORDER SIZING is set to YES)
• ZERO REF—coordinate system zero from which to reference the stock zero
position
• X REF POSITION—locate the stock on X axis relative to the ZERO REF; can
use Store Position or can be set to Part Zero with softkey
• Y REF POSITION—locate the stock on Y axis relative to the ZERO REF; can
use Store Position or can be set to Part Zero with softkey
• Z REF POSITION—locate the stock on Z axis relative to the ZERO REF; can
use Store Position or can be set to Part Zero with softkey
• BOX LENGTH (X, Y, Z)—specify lengths when MANUAL STOCK SIZING is
YES and STOCK TYPE is BOX
• CYLINDER—set dimensions when MANUAL STOCK SIZING is YES and
STOCK TYPE is CYLINDER
• DIRECTION—specify POS X, NEG X, POS Y, NEG Y, POS Z, or NEG Z
• LENGTH—specify length along axis from reference position
• RADIUS—specify stock radius

Tool Setup
Use the Tool Setup screen to describe the tools that will be used for the part program.
You can access this screen from either the Input screen or the Part Setup screen by
selecting the Tool Setup softkey.

To review all tools currently programmed, go to the Tool Review screen.

When running a previously created part program, Tool Setup must


be carefully checked to be certain the tools described for the old
program match the tools planned for the new program. If a tool
breaks or is not available when running a previously created part
program, the Tool Setup information must be changed.

See also:

Tool Setup Fields, on page 4 - 18 and Tool Setup Softkeys, on page 4 - 22

Tool Calibration Modes


Tool measurement and Part Setup Z measurements can be set with one of two modes:
Zero Calibration or Absolute Tool Length. The mode is selected in Utilities/User
Preferences/Tool Utilities and Settings. See Tool Utilities and Settings, on page 3 - 6.

4 - 14 Programming Basics 704-0116-110 Getting Started with WinMax Mill


If a program’s tools were calibrated using one mode, and that
program is loaded into a control that is set to the other mode, a
message is displayed that the program’s tool calibrations cannot be
used. The program data is loaded, but the tool calibration data is
not; tool calibration fields are set to zero.

Zero Calibration Mode


With the Zero Calibration method of tool measurement, tools are calibrated to a plane in
the Z-axis as referenced from the Z Home position. Each tool used in a program should
be calibrated to the same plane. To use Zero Calibration mode:

1. In the Tool Setup screen, enter the number of the tool to be calibrated into the
Tool Number field.
2. If the tool is in spindle, jog Z down to the reference plane or gauge block.
3. Select Store Machine Position softkey or button on the Jog Unit.
All tools should be calibrated to the same reference plane.

4. If the reference plane is not the same as Z=Part Zero for program depth:
a. Select Part Setup softkey.
b. In Offset Z field, enter distance from reference plane to Part Zero, or use
calibrated tool to touch off Z=0 plane and select the Store Machine Position
softkey or button on the Remote Jog Unit.

If the plane that all tools are touched off of is the top of the workpiece, all program
dimensions for Z will be from Z=0. If the plane is not the top of the workpiece (as when a
gauge block is used), the operator can use the Offset Z field in Part Setup to set the
distance from the gauge block or other plane to the top of the workpiece plane. See Part
Setup, on page 4 - 3 for more information.

Absolute Tool Length mode


With the Absolute Tool Length method, the absolute length of the tool from the spindle
nose to the tip of the tool is stored in Tool Setup. Each tool used in a program should be
calibrated to the same gauge device set on table top. To use Absolute Tool Length Mode:

1. In the Tool Setup screen, enter the number of the tool to be calibrated into the
Tool Number field.
2. If the tool is in spindle, jog Z down to the gauge block.
3. Select Store Machine Position softkey or button on the Jog Unit.
4. Part Zero is stored separately in the Part Zero Z field in Part Setup and is the
distance from the gauge block to the Z=0 of the workpiece:
a. Select Part Setup softkey.
b. In Part Zero Z field, enter distance from gauge device to part zero, or use
calibrated tool to touch off Z=0 plane and select the store machine softkey
or button on the jog unit.

Setup of Gauge Device

To use Absolute Tool Length mode, you must define the Z location for the table top and

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-110 Programming Basics 4-15


the touch off device(s). This needs to be done only once unless the touch off device
changes. Access the Tool Measurement screen with the Tool Measurement Settings
softkey on the 2nd set of Tool Setup softkeys (use the More softkey):

Figure 4–9. Tool Measurement screen

Tool Measurement fields are:

• Touch-Off Device—identifies the device to be used. The control allows up to


six devices.
• Device—defines the tool setter method: gauge block or tool probe, if
equipped.
• Height—specifies the height of gauge or probe relative to the Table Top Z.
• Z Location— calculates the difference between Table Top Z and the height of
the device.
• Notes—enter a description of the device specified.
• Table Top Z—defines the machine reference position of the table top from
machine zero.

To set the Table Top Z position:

1. Advance to Table Top Z field.


2. Place a gauge of known length on table top.
3. Jog Z-axis down and carefully touch spindle nose to top of gauge block.
4. Select Store Z Location softkey or press the store position button on remote
jog unit.
5. Subtract the length of the gauge block from the value stored in Table Top Z
field.

4 - 16 Programming Basics 704-0116-110 Getting Started with WinMax Mill


With Table Top Z field highlighted, you can type in length of the
gauge block followed by enter. For example, if Table Top Z measures
-562.259, using a 200 length gauge, type “200-” and enter to set
Table Top Z to -762.259.

Once Table Top Z is set it does not have to be changed or set again,
even if new devices are used. This field and the calculated Z Location
fields should not be edited.

To set up a gauge device:

1. In the Touch-Off Device field, select the device number to be used when
measuring tool length. Up to six different devices can be set, but only the one
currently selected in the Touch-Off Device field is active when setting tool
length.
2. Advance to the row number that corresponds to the touch-off device number.
3. In the Device column, select gauge.
4. In the Height column, enter the height of the gauge.
Z Location field will be automatically calculated by adding the height
to the Table Top Z value. Do not edit Z Location column.

5. Multiple gauges can be set up by specifying height in the appropriate row (1-
6). However, the active device for measuring tool length is the one specified in
the Touch-Off Device field.
All values set in Tool Measurement Settings are retained in the
control and are applicable to all programs. They are not program
specific.

To set up a probe device:

1. Follow the steps to set up a single gauge device (for example, set up gauge for
device) and set touch-off device to Device 1.
2. In Tool Setup, use any tool to touch-off on the Device 1 gauge.
3. Select Store Machine Position softkey or Store Position button on jog unit.
4. In Tool Measurement Screen, select the touch-off device to be used when
probing tool length.
5. In the appropriate row, select Probe as the device from the drop-down Device
list.
6. Jog the tool down to the probe until probe is engaged.
7. With cursor in the Z Location column, select Store Position button on jog unit
or Store Z Location softkey. This will calculate the height of the probe from
Table Top Z.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-110 Programming Basics 4-17


Tool Setup Fields
The DRO is displayed at the top of the Tool Setup screen. See Digital Read Out (DRO), on
page 4 - 10 for more information.

The Tool Setup fields are defined as follows (note that not all fields appear on the screen
for all tools):

• Tool Number—Identifies the number of the programmed tool.


• For a new program, enter a new number in the Tool Number field and
move to another field to display Tool Setup fields.
• After at least one tool has been programmed, can add another tool:
• Enter new tool in Tool Number field.
• Use right arrow to create next available numeric tool number.
• The range of possible tool numbers is 1 through 9999 and is set in the
Tool Changer Specifications function in the Machine Specifications screen
in Utilities.
• The Next Tool and Previous Tool softkeys become available when more
than one tool has been programmed. Use these softkeys as appropriate
to access tool setup screens within a program.
Tool numbers do not necessarily correspond exactly to tool pot
numbers on the magazine of your ATC.

• Location—Identifies the physical location of the tool:


• Spindle—tool is in spindle
• Manual—tool is defined
• Auto—tool is in ATC magazine
• Pock—displays the tool pocket location of the tool

4 - 18 Programming Basics 704-0116-110 Getting Started with WinMax Mill


• Tool Type—Identifies the type of tool. Use the appropriate softkey or drop-
down list to select a tool type. If you do not see the type of tool that you wish
to use, select the More Î softkey to display more Type softkeys. The tool
types are:

Standard Tools WinMax-Only Tools

Drill Center Drill

Tap Chamfer Mill

Boring Head Bull Nose Mill

End Mill Ream

Face Mill Spot Drill

Ball Nose Mill Forming Tap

Back Spotface Drill Counter Bore

Probe Counter Sink

Gun Drill Keyseat Mill

Thread Mill

Taper Radius End Mill

Corner Round Mill

Dove Tail Mill

Engraving Mill

• Diameter—Identifies the nominal diameter of the tool's cutting surface (i.e.,


the diameter before the tool suffers from normal wear).
The diameter range is 0 through 99.9999 inches/2539.997 mm. The
Diameter also appears on the Tool Geometry screen.

The programmed diameter is used to automatically determine cutter


compensation during milling operations. The system calculates the
radius of the cutting tool and automatically allows for this distance
when performing milling operations. This means it is not necessary
to remember the size of the cutting tool or manually calculate tool
offsets when programming the part.

• Zero Calibration (Zero Calibration Mode)—identifies Z-axis position of


the tool tip when positioned at workpiece or gauge block. A (P) is displayed if
the value is set by probing. See Zero Calibration Mode, on page 4 - 15 for
more information.
• Tool Cal Length (Absolute Tool Length mode)—identifies the length of
the tool from the spindle nose to the tip of the tool. See Absolute Tool Length
mode, on page 4 - 15 for more information.
• Touch-Off Device (Absolute Tool Length mode)—displays the touch off
device and type (gauge or probe) specified on the Tool Measurement screen.
Displayed for reference only; edited on the Tool Measurement screen.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-110 Programming Basics 4-19


• Shank Diameter—Appears when the tool type is Back Spotface and
represents the diameter of the tool shank.
• Thread Diameter—Appears when the tool type is Tap. Select the Tap icon,
located to the right of the field. Choose the appropriate diameter from the
pop-up box, as shown below:

Use the slider Select desired


to select range diameter

Touch to select

• TPI (or PITCH)—Appears when the tool type is Tap. Taps per Inch (TPI)
appears when the program’s unit of measurement is inch. Pitch appears
when millimeter is the selected unit of measurement. The range is 0.0
through 99.99.
If you enter a value for TPI, WinMax automatically calculates the Pitch. If you
enter a value for Pitch, WinMax calculates TPI.

• Speed (RPM)—Define the correct speed to be used for this tool, if known.
This value will be copied into each new data block in the part program that
uses this tool. If necessary, this parameter can be changed within the new
data block when programming the part.
The system uses the Speed (RPM) value to automatically calculate spindle
speeds for the tool.

You can manually change feed and speed values calculated by the control.

The range is set in Display Machine Specifications, on page 3 - 2 in Utilities.

• Coolant—Define the coolant, if any, to be used for the tool. Coolant is


programmable on a tool-by-tool basis. The softkey and drop-down list
choices change to Off, Primary, Secondary, or Both when the cursor is at
the Coolant field. Select Primary for machines equipped with a coolant
system, Secondary for machines equipped with a secondary coolant system
(i.e. through spindle coolant), and Both for machines with two coolant
systems.
• Surface Speed (FPM)—Use for milling tools (drill, end mill, face mill, or ball
nosed end mill). The Surface Speed, Flutes, and Feed/Flute fields appear.
Enter a Surface Speed in feet per minute (or millimeters per minute), and the
Flutes and Feed/Flute fields appear. Enter values that indicate the number of

4 - 20 Programming Basics 704-0116-110 Getting Started with WinMax Mill


the flutes (teeth) on the tool and the feedrate per flute.
The system uses the values entered in Surface Speed, Flutes, and Feed/Flute
to automatically calculate the feeds and speeds for the tool.

You can manually change all feed and speed values calculated by the control.

• Flutes—Enter the number of cutting flutes for the tool. This entry will be
used to automatically calculate the Mill Feed in all data blocks for this part
program using this tool.
You can manually change all feed and speed values calculated by the control .

• Feed—Displays the default Mill Feed or Plunge Feed (depending on the tool
type). This value is calculated by the control, based on diameter, feed/flute,
and number of flutes for milling tools, or diamter and feed per revolution for
hole-making tools. The value can also be entered directly into the field.
• Feed/Flute (Tooth)—Enter the tool's chipload. This entry will be used to
automatically calculate the Mill Feed in all data blocks for this part program
using this tool.
You can manually change all feed and speed values calculated by the control.

• Cutting Time—displays the number of minutes a tool has been running in


the spindle (seconds are rounded up to the nearest minute). Starts at zero
unless a time is pre-set by the user (if there is already time on the tool).
• Diameter Wear—enter a number to compensate for tool wear.

Diameter Wear = (program tool diameter) - (actual tool diameter)

For example, to adjust a 0.5 inch diameter tool for .001 inch of wear, enter
.001 in the Diameter Wear field to set cutter comp diameter to 0.499 inches.

Compensate for tool wear in this field rather than the Tool Diameter
field. This will maintain the tool diameter and ensure accurate tool
matching with other part programs that use the same tool.

The Diameter Wear value alters the toolpath for cutter compensation. For
example, when milling a circle with Milling Type set to Outside, a positive
number in the Diameter Wear field will result in a smaller diameter cut, and a
negative number will result in a larger diameter cut.

If a probe is used to determine diameter, the Diameter Wear field will contain
the compensated value based on the probed diameter. A (P) appears next to
the Diameter Wear field to indicate that the value was derived from the
probed diameter.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-110 Programming Basics 4-21


Tool Setup Softkeys
The Tool Setup Softkeys are as follows:

• Delete Tool—Deletes all program settings for the tool number entered in the
Tool Field, for a Manual tool. If the tool is in Spindle or Auto, this softkey is
not active.
• Part Setup—Accesses Part Setup screen. See Part Setup, on page 4 - 3 for
more information.
• Part Programming—Accesses fields to enter the exact description of how
the part will be cut. See Part Programming, on page 1 - 2 for more
information.
• Tool Offsets—Available only for NC programs. The tool length offsets appear
on the screen. Tool offsets are used to compensate tool length without
altering the NC program.

Tool offsets are not saved with the NC program.

• Use the Positive Tool Length Compensation (G43) or Negative Tool Length
Compensation (G44) codes. A G49 code specifies tool offset cancel. An
H00 also cancels an offset.
• The G43 and G44 codes set a mode of operation within the program that
is in effect until a G49 or H00 is used. If an H code is used without a G43
or G44, in effect, the value stored in the tool length offset table is used as
the calibrated tool length.
• The four keyboard arrows, Page Up, and Page Down keys scroll through
the 01 to 200 offsets.
• When the Store Machine Position softkey is pressed, a negative Z value
reflecting the Z axis machine position is entered on the screen.

• Tool Home—Allows you to move the tool quickly away from the part. Using
this softkey after Tool Calibration is much faster than pressing the axis jog
buttons on the jog unit. Press this softkey and then press the Start Cycle
button to move the spindle to the change height.
• Set Tool Zero (Zero Calibration mode)—stores the Z-axis position of the
tool tip when at workpiece or gauge block plane. To use this softkey, carefully
jog the tool in the spindle down to the top of the part or to the fixture defined
at the Tool Calibration point and then press the softkey. The system stores
the position of the tool into the current part program and the number
appears in the Zero Calibration field on the Tool Setup screen. This can also
be accomplished by pressing the Store Position button on the jog unit. On the
screen the part display for “Z” changes to zero. In Zero Calibration mode, all
tools used in a part program will need to be calibrated to the same plane.
A warning message is displayed if the edited tool is not the tool in
spindle. Select OK to store the current position for the tool that is
being edited. Select Cancel if you do not want to set tool zero for
that tool.

4 - 22 Programming Basics 704-0116-110 Getting Started with WinMax Mill


• Set Length Using Touch-Off Device (Absolute Tool Length mode)—
stores the tool length when using a gauge or other touch-off device. For a
gauge, carefully jog the tool in the spindle down to the top of the gauge and
select the softkey. The system stores the tool length in the Tool Cal Length
field.
• Set Tool Zero Using Gauge Block (Zero Calibration mode; Probing
only)—stores the Z-axis position of the tool tip when using a gauge block
into the Zero Calibration field and marks the tool as probed so it can be used
in Part Probing. To use this softkey, carefully jog the tool in the spindle down
to the top of the gauge at the Tool Calibration plane and press the softkey.
• More Ηaccesses second set of Tool Setup softkeys.
• Exit—exits the tool setup process and allows return to the Input screen.

Second set of Tool Setup softkeys:

• Advanced Tool Settings—set Tool Geometry, Feed and Speed, Surface


Finish Quality, and other tool information.
• Change Tool Number—Allows you to change the tool number for the
current tool displayed.
• Tool Probing—Accesses the Probing Parameters, on page 4 - 46. Probing is
available only with BMCs.
• Program Parameters—Accesses the program parameters.
• Part Program Tool Review—Accesses the tool review screen.
• Tool Measurement Settings (Absolute Tool Length mode)—accesses
the Tool Measurement screen where touch-off device height is set.
• More ΗAccess first set of Tool Setup Softkeys.
• Exit—Exits the tool setup process and allows return to the Input screen.

Advanced Tool Settings


See also:

Tool Geometry, on page 4 - 24


Feed and Speed, on page 4 - 26
NC SFQ, on page 4 - 28
Supplier, on page 4 - 28
Notes, on page 4 - 28
Edit Apt Parameters, on page 4 - 29

Basic tool information is stored in Tool Setup and additional information can be set in the
Advanced Tool Settings screens. Tool Geometry, Feed and Speed information, SFQ, and
other tool information are set in the Advanced Tool Settings screen.

Advanced Tool Settings are optional; it is not necessary to adjust


these settings in order to run part programs. They are available to
simplify programming and increase program efficiency.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-110 Programming Basics 4-23


Tool Geometry
Tool dimensions are set in the Geometry tab. Fields denoted with a * are required in
order to draw a tool in Solid Graphics; however, these fields are automatically populated
with information from Tool Setup, as ratio of entered diameter. A picture of the tool is
displayed, and when a field is selected, that area on the picture is denoted.

Tool length field


is selected and
corresponding
area is denoted
on picture

Figure 4–10. Tool Geometry

Most fields on the Geometry screen correspond to tool type, see the table on the
following page for information about these fields. Additional Geometry fields are:

• DIRECTION—spindle direction
• COLOR—the color of the path left by the tool in Solid Graphics. The default
selection is Sequential, where tools are represented in the following order by
color:
• Yellow—1st tool
• Orange—2nd tool
• Violet—3rd tool
• Green—4th tool
• Gray—5th tool
• Blue—6th tool
• Cyan—7th tool
• Magenta—8th tool
• Tan—9th tool
• Lime—10th tool

Alternatively, a specific color can be assigned to a specific tool by changing


the selection in the field.

4 - 24 Programming Basics 704-0116-110 Getting Started with WinMax Mill


The following table provides the tool-type specific fields:

Thread Diameter

Threads per inch


Shank Diameter

Chamfer Angle

Neck Diameter
Ream Chamfer
Cutting Edges
Length of Cut

Stylus length

Tip Diameter
Tool Length

Tip Length
Drill Angle

Drill Angle

Tip Angle
Diameter

Radius
Flutes

Angle
Drill X X X X X X

Tap (cutting) X X X X

Boring head X X X X X

End Mill X x x x

Face Mill x x x X X X

Ball End Mill X X X X X

Back Spotface X X X X X

Probe X X X X

Gun Drill X X X X X X

Center Drill X X X X X X X X

Chamfer Mill X X X X X X

Bull Nose Mill X X X X X X

Ream X X X X X X

Spot Drill X X X X X

Forming Tap X X X X X

Counter Bore X X X X X X X

Counter Sink X X X X X X

Keyseat Mill X X X X X X

Thread Mill X X X X X X

Taper Radius
X X X X X X X
End Mill

Corner Round
X X X X X X X
Mill

Dove Tail Mill X X X X X X X

Engraving Mill X X X X X

Tip diameter is used to calculate Milling Type offset for Chamfer Mill
and Corner Round Mill.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-110 Programming Basics 4-25


When Shank Diameter, Length of Cut, and Tool Length are set as a
ratio of the diameter, values will be automatically recalculated if the
diameter changes until a user-defined value is entered.

Feed and Speed


Feed and Speed in Advanced Tool Settings is available only with the
Tool and Material Library option.

Feed and Speed settings are carried over from Tool Setup or can be specified in the Feed
and Speed tab for specific tool and material combinations in a part program. Choose one
of the materials from the work material list for a specific tool and enter the feeds and
speeds for both roughing and finishing for that tool and work material combination. This
information is saved in the Tool and Material Library and can be utilized in future part
programs without re-entering the speeds and feeds: When the Program Parameters for a
part program specify a work material, the tool number will recall the feed and speed for
that material.

Regardless of the material set in the Feed and Speed tab, the main
Tool Setup screen will always display feeds and speeds for
“Unspecified” material.

Specify work
material

Specify
Roughing & Speed and Feed
Finishing are calculated or
can be specified
in these fields

Figure 4–11. Advanced Tool Settings: Feed and Speed

Roughing and finishing tool parameters can be specified. Fields are:

• SURFACE SPEED—set in Tool Setup, or calculated from speed and diameter


• CHIPLOAD—set in Tool Setup, or calculated based on feeds and flutes
• MAX DEPTH—set maximum depth of cut (optional)
• COOLANT—select coolant type: none, primary, secondary, or both
• SPEED—calculated value or may be user-defined
• FEED—calculated value or may be user-defined
• PECK DEPTH—set peck depth

4 - 26 Programming Basics 704-0116-110 Getting Started with WinMax Mill


• PLUNGE FEED—set plunge feed, or calculated based on Feed Per Rev for
hole-making tools.
Feed Per Rev is used for hole-making tools instead of chipload,
independent of the number of flutes.

Feed and Speed Calculations

The WinMax software automatically performs tool feed and speed calculations for each
tool programmed in Tool Setup, on page 4 - 14. The calculations are carried over to each
data block in the part program using the programmed tool.

The software uses data to perform the calculations from these Tool Setup fields:
Diameter, Speed (RPM), Surface Speed (FPM) or (MPM), Flutes, and Feed/Flute (Tooth).
Feeds and speeds are related using the following formulas: Speed Formulas, on page 4 -
27 and Feed Formulas, on page 4 - 28.

Calculated values are carried forward to the Mill Feed field and Speed (RPM) field for
milling and holes data blocks. You can override automatically calculated values in a data
block by inserting a user defined value. If you manually change a calculated value in Tool
Setup, you will be prompted to update feeds and speeds for the part program data
blocks.

For fields that display truncated decimal point values, you may view
the non-truncated value by pressing and holding the CTRL key and
pressing the period (.) key.

Speed Formulas

The WinMax software uses these formulas to automatically calculate the spindle speeds:

Metric Mode:

Surface Speed x 100

English Units:

If the calculated RPM exceeds the maximum spindle RPM entered in


Machine Specifications, the value appears in red font color.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-110 Programming Basics 4-27


If you enter the Surface Speed (fpm) value, the Speed (RPM) value
will be calculated for you.

If you enter the Speed (RPM) value, the Surface Speed (fpm) value
will be calculated for you.

In some cases, calculation rounding may slightly alter a calculated


value.

For example, if you enter a value of 7000 RPM for the Speed field in
Tool Setup for a Drill operation, the calculated value for Surface
Speed is 458 fpm.

However, if you enter a Surface Speed of 458 fpm in the Surface


Speed field, the calculated value for Speed is 6997 RPM.

Feed Formulas

For Milling data blocks, specify the number of flutes for the tool in the Flutes field.

The software uses the following formula to calculate the Mill Feed:

For Holes operations, flutes are not specified for the tool.

The software uses this formula to calculate the Mill Feed:

If the calculated feedrate exceeds the maximum contouring feedrate


entered in Machine Specifications, the value appears in red font
color.

NC SFQ
NC SFQ in Advanced Tool Settings is available only with the NC/
Conversational Merge option.

Surface finish quality in NC programming is set in the NC SFQ tab of Advanced Tool
Settings. Change Enable Tool SFQ to “YES” and adjust the Tool SFQ. This automatically
sets the SFQ value whenever the tool is used in NC programming and will override the
SFQ value set in Program Parameters or with the G05.3 setting.

Supplier
Supplier in Advanced Tool Settings is available only with the Tool and
Material Library option.

The Supplier tab is optionally used to store information about tool supplier and orders in
memo-type fields.

Notes

4 - 28 Programming Basics 704-0116-110 Getting Started with WinMax Mill


Notes in Advanced Tool Settings is available only with the Tool and
Material Library option.

The Notes tab is used to store notes and miscellaneous information about a tool in a
memo-type field.

Edit Apt Parameters


The Edit Apt Parameters fields are defined as follows:

• Tool—displays the tool number and type entered on the Tool Setup screen.
This field cannot be edited. To change tools, go to Tool Setup, on page 4 - 14.
• NC Gear Range—define the spindle gear range. 0 = Low; 9 = High.
• NC Tool Number—indicate the starting tool in the tool changer. The range is
0 to 999.
• NC Diameter Offset—indicate the tool diameter to be used for cutter
compensation. This field is used for posting only. This will not affect a file that
is saved as an ISNC file.
If Cutter Comp is selected from the Output Tool Path As field on the
Post Processor Configuration screen, the value in the NC Diameter
Offset field will be put into the APT file. This value will refer to the
tool diameter offset on the target machine. If Centerline is selected
from the Output Tool Path As field, then the value entered in the NC
Diameter Offset field will not affect the APT file.

• NC Length Offset—indicate the length offset at the machine tool.

Change Tool Number


The Change Tool Number softkey allows you to change the number of an existing tool or
copy the tool and give it a different number while retaining the tool with its same number.

To change Tool Number or create a copy of a tool, display the Tool Number in Tool Setup
and select more to access Change Tool Number softkey. The Current Tool Description and
New Tool Number fields are displayed. Type a number into the New Tool Number field and
select one of the following softkeys:

• Change Tool Number—changes the number of the tool to the new Tool
Number. The old tool number is simply changed to the new number. If the
new tool number is already assigned to another tool, then the tool numbers
are swapped.
• Copy Tool—adds a new tool that is identical to the Current Tool Description.
If the New Tool Number is not in the current program or Tool & Material
Library, the current tool is copied to the New Tool Number. If the New Tool
Number is in the current program or Tool & Material Library, a prompt
appears that the New Tool Number selected will be replaced with a copy of
the current tool.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-110 Programming Basics 4-29


Part Program Tool Review
Use the PART PROGRAM TOOL REVIEW softkey on the Program Review screen to review
the tools used in a specific part program. This screen lists all tools used in a program, and
the program block where they are used. The location column indicates if the tool is in
Manual, Auto, or Spindle.

Part Program Tool Review is available for Conversational


Programming only in WinMax Mill versions 7.1.x.

List of tools
used in program

Supplier, Order,
and Notes tabs
can be used to
keep track of
other tool
Program blocks information
in which
highlighted
tool is used
(highlight block
and select the
EDIT BLOCK F1
softkey to jump to
the program block)

Figure 5. Part Program Tool Review of a Conversational program

Jump to a program block by highlighting the block and selecting the


EDIT BLOCK F1 softkey.

Tool information can be entered into the Supplier, Order, and Notes tabs at the bottom of
the Part Program Review screen. Information entered on the Notes tab can be viewed in
the Select Tool screen (accessed with the Select Tool from List softkey when entering a
tool in a program block).

The Supplier, Order, and Notes tabs are only available with the Tool &
Material Library option.

4 - 30 Programming Basics 704-0116-110 Getting Started with WinMax Mill


Part Program Tool Review for NC Programs
Part Program Tool Review in NC programming scans the current NC program for T codes
to determine the tools used in the program. T codes are ignored if they are inside a
comment (surrounded by parentheses) or if they are an argument in a macro call
(preceded by a G65).

Tools are listed by number. When a tool is selected (highlighted), the Block list will display
the number and NC text of all blocks that contain the T code for a tool change to the
selected tool, as shown below:

List of tools
used in program

Program blocks
in which
highlighted
tool is used
(highlight block
and select the
EDIT BLOCK F1
softkey to jump to
the program block)

Figure 6. Part Program Tool Review of an NC program

Jump to a program block by highlighting the block and selecting the


EDIT BLOCK F1 softkey.

If a tool in the current NC program is not defined in Tool Setup, it appears in the Tool
Review list as an unknown tool with a diameter of 0 and an unknown location. This is
shown below.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-110 Programming Basics 4-31


Figure 7. Tool Review showing Unknown tool in NC program

An undefined tool can be added to the NC tool setup by selecting the tool in the list,
selecting the Tool Setup softkey, and selecting a type or entering data for the new tool.
The tool can also be quickly added as an unknown tool with a diameter of 0 by selecting
the Add As Manual Tool softkey.

Part Program Tool Review Softkeys


Softkeys on the Part Program Tool Review screen are:

• Import Functions F1—access the Part Setup screen to establish part zero,
centerline, offset Z, safety work region, and other parameters. See Import
Functions, on page 4 - 48 for more information.
• Tool Setup F2—access Tool Setup. See Tool Setup, on page 4 - 14 for more
information.
• Part Programming F3—access and create data blocks of a part program.
The current program's data blocks appear on screen when this softkey is
used. Delete, add, edit, and navigate through the data blocks. The NC editor
is displayed for NC programs. See Conversational Part Programming for more
information.
• Program Parameters F4—accesses the Program Parameters screen to
specify data common to all program data blocks. See Program Parameters,
on page 4 - 38 for more information.
• Tool Change Review Screen F5—access the Tool Change Review screen to
see all tool changes in the part program. Available with the Tool Change
Optimization option. See Tool Change Review, on page 11 - 3 for more

4 - 32 Programming Basics 704-0116-110 Getting Started with WinMax Mill


information.
• Match Tools F6—access tool matching results. See Tool Matching, on page 4
- 33 for more information.
• Add As Manual Tool F7—adds the highlighted unmatched tool as a Manual
tool in the Tool & Material Library and assigns it the next available tool
number.

Tool Matching
When a new program is loaded and the Tool & Material Library option is enabled:

1. The new program’s tools are compared to the tools in the Tool & Material
Library to identify a match by tool type and diameter.
The diameter is set in the Tool Matching: Maximum Diameter
Difference field in Tool Utilities and Settings, on page 3 - 6.

2. If only one tool match is found, the program will use that tool number,
including the Zero Calibration, from the Tool & Material Library. Note that Feed
and Speed data will not be replaced in the program.
3. If more than one match exists, WinMax then looks at tool number. If it finds
the same tool number, type, and diameter, it will match the tool.
4. If there are no matches, tools are either loaded into the Tool & Material Library
as Manual, or users can select from a list of tools in the Tool & Material Library
that are similar to the unmatched tool. The AUTOMATICALLY LOAD
UNMATCHED TOOLS AS MANUAL field in Tool Utilities and Settings, on page 3
- 6 controls this:
• When the field is set to Yes, any unmatched tools from the new part
program will be added to the Tool & Material Library and will be assigned
to the first available tool number.
For example, a new program is loaded with tool #12 as a 0.375 inch end
mill. If tool #12 in the Tool & Material Library is not a 0.375 inch end mill
and no other tool in the Tool & Material Library is a 0.375 inch end mill,
then this tool will be added to the Tool & Material Library as a Manual tool
and will be assigned the first available tool number.

• When the field is set to NO, a prompt to match tools appears. Answer YES
to the prompt to review the unmatched tools.

Tools that are unmatched are displayed in Tool Matching Results.

Tool Matching Results


When tools from the part program cannot find a matching tool in the Tool & Material
Library, these unmatched tools are listed in the Tool Matching Results screen, accessed
with the MATCH TOOLS softkey from the Tool Review screen. Unmatched tools from the
current part program are listed in the upper “Tools to be matched” section; as each
unmatched tool is highlighted, a list of tools from the Tool & Material Library with the
same tool type are listed in the lower, “Closest matches” section. Tools of the same type
are listed in order of closest to furthest diameter difference from the highlighted tool.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-110 Programming Basics 4-33


Unmatched tools

Difference in
tool diameter List of similar tools
from in Tool Library (list
unmatched corresponds to the
tool highlighted tool)

Figure 4–1. Tool Matching Results

The CHOOSE AS REPLACEMENT F4 softkey appears when you select a tool from the
Closest matches list. Use this softkey to replace an unmatched tool with the selected tool
from the Tool & Material Library.

If there is not a match in “Closest matches,” use the EXIT softkey to return to the Part
Program Tool Review screen, and use the ADD AS MANUAL TOOL F4 softkey to add the
tool to the Tool & Material Library. Use the TOOL SETUP F1 softkey to see the tool details.

The SAVE TO DATABASE F6 softkey appears when you select an unmatched tool from the
list. Select the softkey to save the tool to the Tool and Material Database.

Saving a tool to the Tool and Material Database will not match a tool
with an existing tool in the Tool & Material Library. The program will
still consider the tool unmatched and will not run until a match is
selected or a new tool is added to the Tool & Material Library.

4 - 34 Programming Basics 704-0116-110 Getting Started with WinMax Mill


Tool Management
Tool Management screens are accessed in Manual Mode with the TOOL MANAGEMENT F1
softkey. Tool information can be stored independent of the part program data using the
Tool & Material Library option. Program-specific tool information (such as feed rate and
speed) created for one program can be reused when tools are selected from the library
for a subsequent program. Tool Management tabs are:

• Spindle—shows the tool located in the machine’s spindle.


• Auto—lists the tools that are in the machine’s tool magazine.
• Manual—lists the tools that may be utilized on the machine but are not
currently in the machine’s magazine or spindle. The Manual tab is active only
with the Tool & Material Library option.

Spindle
The Spindle tab displays information about the tool in spindle and allows you to set the
next tool to execute a tool change, or to change the current tool in spindle.

Fields are:

• NEXT TOOL—lists the next tool to call into the spindle


• TOOL IN SPINDLE—lists the current tool in the spindle

Auto
The Auto tab lists the tools in the ATC (automatic tool changer) magazine. Tools are listed
by pocket number. The view can be customized to show only occupied pockets or to
disable even-numbered pockets (for large tools), using the checkboxes at the top of the
screen.

Softkeys on the Tool Library Auto tab are:

• MOVE TOOL TO SPINDLE F1—when spindle is empty, highlighting a tool on


the Auto or Manual lists will enable this softkey. Select to confirm and the tool
will appear on the SPINDLE tab. The control will prompt to insert the tool into
the spindle.
• SELECT TOOL F2—highlight a tool in the list and touch this softkey to select
the tool
• CLEAR POCKET F3—removes the selected tool from the pocket
• CLEAR ALL POCKETS F4—removes all tools from the Auto list

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-110 Programming Basics 4-35


Manual
The Manual tab shows tools available for use that are resident on the control, but are not
currently in the spindle or ATC. The Manual tab is active only with the Tool & Material
Library option:

Softkeys are:

• MOVE TOOL TO SPINDLE F1—when spindle is empty, highlighting a tool on


the Auto or Manual lists will enable this softkey. Select to confirm and the tool
will appear on the SPINDLE tab. The control will prompt to insert the tool into
the spindle.
• INSERT TOOL F3—moves a tool from Manual to Auto
• Tool Setup F4—accesses the Tool Setup screen
• CHANGE TOOL NUMBER F5—allows you to change the number of a tool in
the list
• CLEAR TOOLS F6—clears (removes) tools from the list:

• CLEAR SELECTED TOOL F1—removes highlighted tool from the Tool


Library
• CLEAR AUTO AND MANUAL TOOLS F2—removes all tools from the Tool
Library
• CLEAR AUTO TOOLS F3—removes all tools in Auto from the Tool Library
• CLEAR MANUAL TOOLS F4—removes all tools in Manual from the Tool
Library

4 - 36 Programming Basics 704-0116-110 Getting Started with WinMax Mill


Tool and Material Database
The Tool and Material Database is available when the Tool & Material Library option is
enabled. It is accessed in Auxiliary Mode. Tool and material information can be entered
and stored in the database. The materials entered into the database are available in the
work material list located on the Feed and Speed tab in Tool Type Setup/Advanced Tool
Settings. This information is saved in the material database and can be utilized in future
part programs without re-entering the speeds and feeds.

To add a tool to the database:

1. Select the TOOLS tab.


2. Select ADD TOOL F1 softkey.
3. Enter the tool information in the fields. See Advanced Tool Settings, on page 4
- 23 for more information about these fields.

Softkeys on the TOOLS tab are:

• ADD TOOL F1—accesses Tool Type Setup screen to add a tool to the
database
• EDIT TOOL F2—accesses Tool Setup to edit tool
• REMOVE TOOL F3—deletes the selected tool from the database
• RELOAD DATABASE F4—TBD
• DATABASE SOURCE F7—TBD

To add a material to the database:

1. Select the MATERIALS tab.


2. Select the ADD MATERIAL F1 softkey.
3. Type the name of the material in the NAME field.
4. Add any notes in the NOTES field.
5. Select the SAVE F1 softkey.

Softkeys on the MATERIALS tab are:

• ADD MATERIAL F1—add a new material to the database


• EDIT MATERIAL F2—change the specifications of a material in the database
• DELETE MATERIAL F3—delete a material from the database
• RELOAD DATABASE F4—TBD
• SELECT MATERIAL FOR PART PROGRAM F5—uses the highlighted
material in the current part program
• DATABASE SOURCE F7—TBD

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-110 Programming Basics 4-37


Program Parameters
Program parameters are displayed on tabs for General 1, General 2, Milling 1, Milling 2,
Holes, Probing, and Performance. The Performance tab in WinMax is active when the
SelectSurface Finish Quality option is enabled. The programmer has the option to make
changes to any or all of the program parameters and save them as user defaults. The
user defaults and original WinMax defaults can be restored by using the appropriate
softkey. Parameters can be altered with the Change Parameters data block during
program execution. Refer to Conversational Part Programming for details.

Refer to these sections in Program Parameters:

General Parameters 1, on page 4 - 39


General Parameters 2, on page 4 - 40
Milling Parameters 1, on page 4 - 41
Milling Parameters 2, on page 4 - 44
Holes Parameters, on page 4 - 45
Probing Parameters, on page 4 - 46
Performance Parameters, on page 4 - 47

Refer to NC Part Programming for information about NC Parameters.

Softkeys on the Program Parameters screen are:

• SAVE AS USER DEFAULTS F4—saves the selected field’s value as the user-
defined default value
• RESTORE USER DEFAULTS F5—restores the user-defined values to a field
that has been populated with other values
• RESTORE WINMAX DEFAULTS F6—restores the WinMax-defined values to
a field that has been populated with other values.
Change Parameters program blocks load the user-defined
parameters set in Program Parameters.

• NC Parameters F7—accesses NC Configuration Parameters. These


parameters are available only with NC Part Programming.

4 - 38 Programming Basics 704-0116-110 Getting Started with WinMax Mill


General Parameters 1
These are the fields on the General 1 tab:

• Retract Clearance—Determines the Z coordinate to which the Z axis


positions before rapid table positioning. This includes a tool moving from one
drilled hole to another, or from one milling operation to another (programmed
in separate data blocks or generated as a patterns operation).
• The default is the maximum programmable Z travel. This is the difference
between the Z-Axis MAX Travel and the Z-Axis MIN Travel as indicated on
the Machine Specifications screen.
• The range is 0 through 99.9999 inches (0 through 2514.6 mm).
If the next operation has a different Z Start value, the CNC always
retracts to the highest dimension. When a Position block is programmed,
the tool always retracts to The safety plane programmed as Z Top of the
Safety Work Region.

• Rapid Traverse—Determines the feedrate that the table (X and Y axes)


moves between one point in the part program to the next point in the
program (rapid table positioning).
• The default is 400 ipm (10160.0 mm/min).
• The Range MAX value is user-defined in the Maximum Rapid Traverse Rate
field on the Machine Specifications screen. The Range MIN value is 0.1
ipm (2.54 mm/min).
• Peck Clearance Plane—Determines the relative distance to the previous
peck level. In conversational programming, the tool retracts to Z Start after
each peck. The tool then rapids down to a position which is the Peck
Clearance distance above the previous peck level before plunging to the next
peck level at plunge feedrate.
Peck Clearance Plane only applies to conversational programs.

• The default is 0.05 inches (1.27 mm).


• The range is 0 through 99.9999 inches (0 through 2514.6 mm).
• Chord Error—Determines the maximum distance the cutter deviates from
the true arc path.
• Override Lockout—Disables the Axis Feed dial on the jog unit of Hurco
controls when set to On. The default is Off.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-110 Programming Basics 4-39


General Parameters 2
These are the fields on the General 2 tab:

• Depletion Retract—Specifies the dimension above the part surface to which


the Z axis retracts. The Z axis retracts while waiting for additional data to be
transmitted into the current program during execution of an NC part
program.
• The default is 0.005 inches (.127 mm).
• The range is 0 through 99.9999 inches (0 through 2514.6 mm).
Depletion Retract only applies to NC programs.

• Interrupt Cycle Z Retract—Retracts the Z axis to Retract Clearance when


you press the Interrupt Cycle console button on a Hurco control.
• Select No to keep the spindle in its current position when the button is
pressed.
• The default is Yes.

• First Peck Offset—Permits modifying the depth of the first peck in milling
and hole operations. Use this feature whenever a first peck needs to be
deeper or shallower than subsequent pecks.
The permitted range is –10.0000 to + 10.0000 inches or –254.00 to
+254.000 millimeters.

The First Peck Offset value is added to the operation’s peck depth in
calculating the first peck only. Use a positive First Peck Offset value for
deeper peck and negative value for shallower peck. A First Peck Offset of
0.000 will run the pecks normally, without any First Peck Offset.

For example, if the peck depth in a drill operation is set to 0.2000 inches and
First Peck Offset is set to +0.0500 inches, then the first peck will be 0.2500
inches down from Z start plane and all subsequent pecks will be 0.2000
inches deep. If the First Peck Offset is set to –0.0500 inches, the result is a
first peck only 0.1500 inches down from Z start plane and every subsequent
peck will be 0.2000 inches deep.

• Move to Safe Pos During TC—Indicates whether or not the table will move
to the right/front of the machine when the operator is changing a tool. If this
field is set to Yes when a part program block calls for a tool change, the table
will move out of the way.
• Include Offset Z in Tool Zero Cal—Indicates whether or not the Offset Z
value in Part Setup is added to the zero calibration value when tool lengths
are adjusted. Default is Yes.
• Yes—Zero Calibration is adjusted by the Offset Z value.
• No—Zero Calibration is the distance from machine home to the tool tip
when positioned at the workpiece or gauge block.
• Tool Change Optimization—Indicates if Tool Change Optimization should
be enabled for the program. Default is No. (This field is available in Program
Parameters only; it is not available in Change Parameters.)
• No—Any Tool Change Optimization blocks are ignored by the program.

4 - 40 Programming Basics 704-0116-110 Getting Started with WinMax Mill


• Yes—Tool Change Optimization blocks are used by the program.
See Tool Change Optimization, on page 11 - 1 for more information.

Milling Parameters 1
Milling parameters apply to cutter motions during conversational milling operations only.

Milling 1 Parameters fields are defined as follows:

• Blend Offset—Determines the distance from the entry point of the part
surface and the Z plunge point where the tool enters the work piece. This
field is used in milling circles, frames, and ellipses.
• The default is 0.1250 inches (3.175 mm).
• The range is 0 through 1.0 inch (0 through 25.4 mm).
• Blend Overlap—Determines the distance the tool travels past the entry
point before it is withdrawn from the part. This field is used in milling circles,
frames, and ellipses.
• The default is 0.1250 inches (3.175 mm).
• The range is 0 through 1.0 inch (0 through 25.4 mm).

1 Start Point

2 1/2 X Length

3 X Length

4 Blend Offset

5 Tool Path

6 Blend Offset

7 Blend Overlap

8 End Point

Figure 4–2. Blend Offset and Blend Overlap

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-110 Programming Basics 4-41


• Finish Feed (%)—Allows you to specify a different feed for finishing
operations without changing the tool. The specified percentage is a multiplier
of the feed entered in Tool Setup. This multiplier is applied whenever the tool
is entered for the finishing operation of a milling block. (See example below.)
If this parameter is changed in either Program Parameters or with a
Change Parameters block, all existing data blocks that are affected
by the multiplier will be updated.

• Finish Speed (%)—Allows you to specify a different speed for finishing


operations without changing the tool. The specified percentage is a multiplier
of the speed entered in Tool Setup. This multiplier is applied whenever the
tool is entered for the finishing operation of a milling block. (See example
below.)
If this parameter is changed in either Program Parameters or with a
Change Parameters block, all existing data blocks that are affected
by the multiplier will be updated.

Finish Feed / Finish Speed example:


Program Parameters: Finish Speed %=120, Finish Feed %=80

Tool Setup: Speed=5000, Feed=100

When a program block is created, the speed is automatically set to 5000


and the feed is set to 100. When the tool is entered into the finishing
operation, the multipliers are applied, and finish speed is set to 6000
(5000 x 120%), finish feed is set to 80 (100 x 80%).

The Finish Feed and Finish Speed parameters are not applied if the
roughing feed or speed in a data block is changed.

Values entered manually into the Finish Feed or Finish Speed fields in
the data block take precedence over these parameters.

If the Tool & Material Library option is enabled, separate roughing


and finishing defaults can be set for each tool. If finishing defaults
are defined for a tool, those values take precedence over the Finish
Feed and Finish Speed multiplier parameters.

• Finish XY—Determines the amount of material in the X-Y axis direction to be


removed by the finish pass.
• The default is 0.2 mm (0.007874 inches).
• The range is 0 through 25.4 mm (0 through 1.0 inches).

Stock is removed up to a maximum of 90% of tool diameter.

For example, if 25 mm is entered in the Finish XY field, and the tool


has a diameter of 10 mm, the XY stock removed on the finish pass
will be 9 mm (90% of the 10 mm tool diameter), despite the number
entered in the Finish XY field.

4 - 42 Programming Basics 704-0116-110 Getting Started with WinMax Mill


• Finish Z—Determines the amount of material in the Z axis dimension to be
removed by the finish pass.
• The default is 0.1 mm (0.003937inches).
• The range is 0 through 1.0 inch (0 through 25.4 mm).

• Milling Direction—Determines the milling type. Select Conventional or


Climb milling for canned milling cycles (e.g., frame, circle, and ellipse) and for
contours (e.g., line, arc).
• The default is Climb.
• The choices are Conventional or Climb.

• Default Pocket Overlap—Determines the cutter step-over movement in a


pocket milling operation. After the first pass, the tool follows a path produced
by offsetting the boundary by the tool radius, plus the pocket overlap for each
pass while avoiding islands inside the boundary.
• The default is 50%.
• The range is 0 through 99%.

• Cutter Comp Param—Determines the programmed tool automatically


follows the finished contour of the part with cutter compensation. Without
cutter compensation, the center line of the programmed tool follows the print
line.
• Insert Arc—Inserts a tangent arc to connect two line segments, or a line
segment and an arc segment (when the two cutter compensated
segments are offset and do not intersect).

1 Programmed Tool Path


2 Cutter Compensated Path
3 Using the Insert Arc Parameter

Figure 4–3. Cutter Compensation using the Insert Arc parameter

• Insert Line—Joins the cutter compensated lines and arcs as described


below:
• Two line segments are extended until they intersect (provided they
form a 90º or greater angle). If the lines form an angle of less than
90º, a line is inserted to connect them.
• Line and arc segments have the line segment extended, and a tangent
line to the arc segment inserted and extended until the lines intersect
(provided they form a 90º or greater angle). If the segments form an
angle of less than 90º, a line is inserted to connect them.
• Two arc segments have tangent lines (to the arcs) inserted and

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-110 Programming Basics 4-43


extended until the lines intersect (provided the extended tangent lines
form a 90º or greater angle). If the extended tangent lines form an
angle of less than 90º, a line or arc is inserted to connect them.

1 Programmed Tool Path


2 Cutter Compensated Path
3 Completed Path Using the Insert Line Parameter

Figure 4–4. Cutter Compensation using the Insert Line parameter

Milling Parameters 2
The Milling 2 Parameters fields are related to the Helical Plunge Option:

• Mill Plunge Type


• Mill Plunge Ramp Slope
• Mill Plunge Helix Radius
• Finish Plunge Type
• Finish Plunge Ramp Slope
• Finish Plunge Helix Radius
• Operator Specify Pocket Start
• Inward Pocket Plunge Near Center

Refer to Helical Plunge in WinMax Mill Options for details about these parameters.

4 - 44 Programming Basics 704-0116-110 Getting Started with WinMax Mill


Holes Parameters
The Holes Parameters fields are defined below:

• Bore Orient Retract—Determines the distance the boring tool moves away
from the part surface at the end of the boring cycle. Used only when a Bore
Orient data block is included in the part program.
• The default is 0.05 mm (0.019685 inches).
• The range is 0 through 99.9999 inches (0 through 2514.6 mm).
• Drill Dwell—Determines the pause (dwell) in seconds before the tool retracts
at the bottom of a drill operation. The most often changed Holes Parameter is
Drill Dwell. This parameter controls the length of time the drill stays at the
bottom of a hole after it has drilled the hole. This parameter is not used for
NC programs.
• The default is 0.5 seconds.
• The range is 0 through 20 seconds. (Set this to 0.0 seconds, and the drill
immediately pulls out of the hole after it is drilled.)
• Bore Dwell—Determines the pause in seconds before the tool retracts at the
bottom of a Bore operation. This parameter is not used for NC programs.
• The default is 1.0 seconds.
• The range is 0 through 20 seconds.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-110 Programming Basics 4-45


Probing Parameters
The Probing Parameters are:

• Automatic Tool Monitoring—indicate if tools that were calibrated with the


probe should be automatically checked with each tool change.
• Zero Cal (Length) Tolerance—indicate the zero calibration (tool length)
used when checking for a defective tool.
• Diameter Tolerance—indicate the diameter tolerance used when checking
for a defective tool.
• Retain Probed Part Setup—allows the probed part setup and/or tool
calibrations to be retained for new program runs. Choices are:
• Do Not Retain—no updates will be made to part zero or tool lengths.
• Retain All—retains part setup and tool calibrations.

Previous versions of WinMax may have included additional selections


which have subsequently been removed; older programs that
contained a selection other than Do Not Retain or Retain All will be
converted to Retain All upon opening, and a message will appear
informing the user.

For example, the following table shows Part Setup values for a sample
program before and after a Probed Part Setup is executed:

Original Part Setup values Probed Part Setup values

Part Zero X = 20.0000 Part Zero X = 19.1234

Part Zero Y = 10.0000 Part Zero Y = 11.1111

Probe Z = 15.0000 Probe Z = 16.5555

Skew Angle = 0.0000 Skew Angle = 2.0045

Zero Cal = 18.0000 Zero Cal = 17.4444


(Tool Setup) (Tool Setup)

If Retain Probed Part Setup is set to Do Not Retain, the original values
for Part Setup and Zero Cal will be restored. Part Setup and Tool Setup
will contain the original data (20, 10, 15, 0, and 18).

If Retain Probed Part Setup is set to Retain All, Part Setup and Tool
Setup will contain the probed values (19.1234, 11.1111, 16.5555,
2.0045, and 17.4444).

OFFSET Z is not affected in any way by the probe block or the


parameter setting.

4 - 46 Programming Basics 704-0116-110 Getting Started with WinMax Mill


Performance Parameters
Surface Finish Quality (SFQ) is enabled with the SelectSurface Finish Quality option. SFQ
parameters can be modified in either Conversational or NC programming. The default
SFQ for roughing is 80 and finishing is 20. Recommended values are:

SFQ Desired Result

1-20 High precision parts /finishing

21-79 Good surface quality / finishing, semi-finishing

80-100 High throughput / roughing

Table 4–1. Recommended SFQ values

If SelectSurface Finish Quality is not enabled, conversational


roughing tools use SFQ of 80 and conversational finishing tools use
SFQ of 20; NC default is 50.

Smoothing Tolerance specifies the maximum allowable deviation from the tool path. The
range is 0.0000 to 0.0500 inches (0.0000 to 1.2700 mm); default is 0.0005 inches
(0.01270 mm). This corresponds to NC code G05.2.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-110 Programming Basics 4-47


Import Functions
Import Functions imports Part Setup, Tool Setup, Program Parameters, Part Program
information, and/or NC states from an existing Conversational program or NC State file
into the active part program, as follows:

1. Select the IMPORT FUNCTIONS F5 softkey from the Input screen.


2. Select the appropriate softkey for a Conversational or NC program.
3. Choose the file from which components will be imported and select the LOAD
F1 softkey.
4. Choose one or more components from the list and select the BEGIN
OPERATION F2 softkey.
5. Select OK to continue the import operation.

Conversational Components
These are the Conversational components that can be imported from an existing part
program into a new part program:

• Part Setup—imports the Part Setup from the selected program into the
current part program.
• Tool Setup—imports tools from the Tool Setup of the selected part program
to the current tool setup on the machine. If the Tool & Material Library option
is enabled, unique tools are added as Manual and other tools may be
matched (see Tool Matching, on page 4 - 33).
• Program Parameters—imports the Program Parameters from the selected
program into the current part program.
• Part Program—imports the part program from the selected program into
the current part program.

NC States
NC components are stored in the NC States file on the control. Only one NC States file
exists on a control, and it is updated as changes are made to current or new NC
programs. When an NC States file is saved, a corresponding NC Tools file (.nct) is also
created with the same name in the same directory. For example, the NC States file
Program Name.ncs. will have a corresponding tool file named Program Name.nct. The
.nct file must remain in the same directory with the same name as the associated .ncs
file. The .nct file can be imported into a program the same way a .ncs file is.

When transferring an NC program from one machine to another the NC States file from
the original machine can be imported to another machine using the IMPORT NC STATES
softkey. These are the components that can be imported from an NC States file into a
new program:

• Program Parameters—imports the Program Parameters.


• Part Setup—imports the Part Setup.

4 - 48 Programming Basics 704-0116-110 Getting Started with WinMax Mill


• Tool Setup—imports tools from the Tool Setup of the selected part program
to the current tool setup on the machine. If the Tool & Material Library option
is enabled, unique tools are added as Manual and other tools may be
matched (see Tool Matching, on page 4 - 33).
• Tool Offsets—imports Tool Offsets.
• Work Offsets—imports Work Offsets.
• NC Parameters—imports the NC parameters.
• NC Variables—imports NC variables.
The imported components will replace the current components from
the open program; they are not merged together.

Either the .ncs or the .nct file can be selected to import any NC
component(s); when either file is selected both are used.

NC States are saved as follows:

1. Select the IMPORT FUNCTIONS F5 softkey from the Input screen.


2. Select the SAVE NC STATE TO FILE F6 softkey.
3. Choose the location to which the file will be saved in the SAVE STATE FILE
screen.
4. Type the name of the file in the FILE NAME field, or use the default,
ncstate.ncs, which appears automatically in this field.
It is recommended to rename the NC States file to match the active
part program. When renaming, you must retain the .ncs extension at
the end of the file name. For example, Program Name.ncs.

5. Select the SAVE F1 softkey to save the NC States file. A message that the file
saved successfully will briefly appear on screen.

Importing NC States into Conversational Programs


NC States information that is valid for Conversational programs (the Part Setup, Tool
Setup, and Program Parameters) can be imported into a Conversational program.

1. Make sure the current part program is Conversational.


2. Select the IMPORT FUNCTIONS F5 softkey from the Input screen.
3. Select the IMPORT NC STATE FROM FILE F4 softkey.
4. Choose the .ncs or .nct file from which components will be imported and select
the LOAD F1 softkey. Either file may be used to import any component.
5. Choose one or more components from the list and select the BEGIN
OPERATION F2 softkey.
6. Select OK to continue the import operation.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-110 Programming Basics 4-49


Copy and Change Blocks
To make changes to several data blocks at one time, use the Copy and Change Blocks
softkey to access the Block Editor.

These are the softkeys:

• Copy Blocks—Duplicate the specified data blocks in another location in the


part program.
• Move Blocks—Remove the specified data blocks from their current location
and transfer them to another location in the part program.
• Delete Blocks—Remove the specified data blocks from the part program.
• Modify Dimensions—Add offsets to the axes' coordinate dimensions
currently stored in the part program for a range of blocks.
• Change All Feeds, Speeds, and Tools—Substitutes new feeds and speeds
for all tools within the specified range of data blocks.
• Change Feeds and Speeds by Tool—Substitutes new speeds and feedrates
for a specified tool within a range of data blocks.
The following fields appear when you select either softkey, except where
noted otherwise:

• Start Block—Enter the number of the first block in the program to be


changed.
• End Block—Enter the number of the last block in the program to be
changed.
• Put Block Before—Move a block in the program before the indicated
block.
• Change Tool Number—Identify the tool number. Blocks using this tool
number will be changed. (This field appears only for the Change Feeds
and Speeds by Tools screen.)
• New Speed (RPM)—Enter a new Speed (RPM).
• New Feed—Enter a new Feed.
• New Plunge Feed—Enter a new Plunge Feed.
• New Tool—Enter a new Tool.
• New Finish Tool—Enter a new Speed (RPM).

Enter the changes in the fields and select the Make the Change softkey.

The Copy Blocks, Move Blocks, and Delete Blocks softkeys are
also available for editing a current program.

4 - 50 Programming Basics 704-0116-110 Getting Started with WinMax Mill


Copy, Move, or Delete Blocks
The COPY BLOCKS screen is used to duplicate the specified data blocks in another
location in the part program.

The MOVE BLOCKS screen is used to remove the specified data blocks from their current
location and transfer them to another location in the part program.

The DELETE BLOCKS screen is used to remove specified data blocks from the part
program.

Fields on the screens are:

• Start Block—Enter the number of the first block in the program to be


changed.
• End Block—Enter the number of the last block in the program to be changed.
• Put Block Before—Move a block in the program before the indicated block.

Modify Dimensions
Modify Dimensions allows you to add offsets to the axes' coordinate dimensions currently
stored in the part program for a range of blocks.

These softkey choices appear when you select the Modify Dimensions softkey:

• Start Block - enter the number of the first block in the program to be
modified.
• End Block - enter the number of the last block in the program to be
modified.
• X Offset - enter the offset for the X axis.
• Y Offset - enter the offset for the Y axis.
• Z Offset - enter the offset for the Z axis.
• Change Z-Start - enter the new Z-Start position.
• A Offset - enter the offset for the A axis.
• B Offset - enter the offset for the B axis.

Enter the modifications in the fields and select the MAKE THE CHANGE softkey to
modify the programmed dimensions.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-110 Programming Basics 4-51


Changing Feeds, Speeds, and Tools
Feeds, Speeds, and Tools can be changed for a range of blocks in a part program with the
following softkeys from the Block Editor screen:

• Change All Feeds Speeds & Tools—change Feed, Speed, and Tool for
specified program blocks. Fields are:
• Start Block—Enter the number of the first block in the program to be
changed.
• End Block—Enter the number of the last block in the program to be
changed.
• New Speed (RPM)—Enter a new Speed (RPM).
• New Feed—Enter a new Feed.
• New Plunge Feed—Enter a new Plunge Feed.
• New Tool—Enter a new Tool.
• New Finish Tool—Enter a new Speed (RPM).

• Change Feeds & Speeds By Tool—Make changes to feeds and speeds for
blocks using a specified tool. Fields are:
• Start Block—Enter the number of the first block in the program to be
changed.
• End Block—Enter the number of the last block in the program to be
changed.
• Change Tool—Enter tool; changes will be made only to blocks using this
tool.
• New Speed (RPM)—Enter a new Speed (RPM).
• New Feed—Enter a new Feed.
• New Plunge Feed—Enter a new Plunge Feed.
• New Tool—Enter a new Tool.

Change Surface Finish Quality


The surface finish quality can be changed for a range of blocks in a part program. Fields
are:

• Start Block—Enter the number of the first block in the program to be


changed.
• End Block—Enter the number of the last block in the program to be
changed.
• Change Rough SFQ—Specify Yes or No.
• Rough SFQ—Enter the Rough SFQ for the range of blocks.
• Change Finish SFQ—Specify Yes or No.
• Finish SFQ—Enter the Finish SFQ for the range of blocks.

4 - 52 Programming Basics 704-0116-110 Getting Started with WinMax Mill


Review Mode
The Program Review screen is accessed with the console Review key. Data blocks and sub
blocks of the active part program are displayed in a list, and the tools used in each data
block are displayed in the Tool Data list. Program blocks can be moved and added in the
Program Review screen.

Sub-blocks within the


selected data block

List of program’s
data blocks
Select to jump
to selected
data block or
sub-block

Tools used in the


selected data block

(When a tool is
highlighted, the
EDIT TOOL softkey
will access tool
setup for that tool)

Figure 4–5. Program Review Screen

Program Review softkeys are:

• Multiple Block Functions F1—allows multiple blocks to be cut, copied, or


pasted between programs:
• Cut F1—highlight data block(s) and touch this softkey to delete from the
current program. Block(s) can then be pasted into the same or a different
program.
• Copy F2—highlight data block(s) and select this softkey to make a copy
that can be pasted into the same or a different program.
• Paste F3—places previously cut or copied data block(s) above the
highlighted data block.
• Delete F4—highlight data block(s) and touch this softkey to permanently
remove the block from the program.
Multiple blocks can be selected simultaneously by holding the F and
Alt keys while pressing the up or down arrow keys.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-110 Programming Basics 4-53


• Convert to Rotary F6—converts linear dimensions to rotary dimensions;
a flat geometry can be wrapped around a cylinder, given a radius. Blocks
that can be wrapped are: contour, circle, frame, and TrueType lettering
holes (locations).
• Convert to Linear F7—converts rotary dimensions to linear dimensions.
For WinMax Desktop and WinMax Mill on machines not equipped with
rotary, the Default Conversational Program Type must be
changed to a rotary type in order to convert the program to rotary.
This is changed in Conversational Settings in Utilities.

• Delete Block / Delete Sub Block F2—deletes the highlighted data block or
sub-block.
• Part Programming F3—allows you to edit the selected data block or sub-
block.
• Program Parameters F4—access General, Milling, Holes, Probing, and
Performance parameters. NC parameters are accessible for NC programs.
• Import Functions F5—access the Part Setup screen to establish part zero,
centerline, offset Z, safety work region, and other parameters.
• Part Program Tool Review F6—review the tools used in the part program.
• Insert Block / Sub Block Before F7—inserts a new program block or sub-
block before the selected block or sub-block.

4 - 54 Programming Basics 704-0116-110 Getting Started with WinMax Mill


Auto Mode
Programs are run in Auto Mode. Press the Auto button on the console to access Auto
Mode to check for errors, compute estimated run time, recovery/restart, perform a dry
run, or run a part program. The following softkeys are available in Auto Mode:

• Use Editing File F1—selects the active program file to run. If this softkey is
not selected, WinMax defaults to the last program run. If the last program run
does not match the program that is being edited (as indicated in status bar),
the operator will be prompted to select which program to run.
• Feed & Speed Optimization F2—fine tunes program execution, using the
Axis Feed Rate and Spindle Speed dials to adjust values. This softkey is
disabled in Test Mode.
• Check for Errors F4—checks the program from the Start Block through the
End Block and displays error status. The number of the data block containing
the error is included in the error message.
The time required for error checking depends upon the program’s length and
complexity. Select the Abort Operation softkey to stop error checking at any
time.

• Compute Estimated Run Time F5—a pop-up window displays an estimate


of time it takes to run the program. Pressing any console key will remove the
pop-up window. Select the Abort Operation softkey to stop computing
estimated run time.
Error checking automatically occurs during Compute Estimated Run Time.

• Recovery Restart F6—restarts a conversational or NC part program;


typically the point at which the program was interrupted. This softkey is
disabled in Test Mode.
• For Conversational Programs—if necessary, Conversational Start and End
blocks can be changed from the default.
For Mill Contour data blocks: Recovery Restart only occurs at segment 0
of a Mill Contour data block, not at a segment within a data block.

For Pattern data blocks: when Recovery Restart begins at the first block of
a pattern, all instances of the pattern are run. If Recovery Restart begins
at a block within the pattern, WinMax prompts the user to specify which
instance to restart at, and then requests any additional restart
information for the start block.

• For NC Programs—use the following softkeys to restart an NC program


after it was aborted either by the machine or the operator. Preparatory
functions such as coolant, feeds and speeds, and offsets will be executed
before machining resumes, and Tool Vector input is checked.

• Set Restart Marker—manually sets the restart marker. An ‘r’ will


appear to the left of the block selected, and will clear if the program
successfully runs.
• Auto Set Restart Marker—automatically marks the last block being
executed when the program was stopped, or where an error occurred
during error checking.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-110 Programming Basics 4-55


• Reset Restart Marker—clears the Restart Marker and cancels the
Recovery Restart operation. Can be used on a block after a G41/G42.
• Dry Run F7—active in Test Run mode only, performs a program test run to
identify potential problems before cutting the part. Specify all or a portion of
the part program that will be tested in the Start and End blocks.
Trace the tool over the part at the programmed minimum Z level with the
Spindle Off. Peck cycles and roughing passes are skipped.

If the Z-Start value is set below the stock surface, the minimum Z
value must be programmed so the tool does not plunge into the part.

• Run Program F8—initiates program execution and displays monitoring


information. If the machine is not calibrated, the Manual screen immediately
displays. This softkey is disabled in Test Mode.

Auto Mode Monitoring


The Auto Mode Monitoring screen appears when the RUN PROGRAM softkey is selected
and program execution begins. The upper part of the screen displays the DRO. See
Digital Read Out (DRO), on page 4 - 10 for more information. The lower area of the
screen displays the Spindle Load Monitor, the data block executed, the type of operation,
and the part count. For NC programs, five lines of NC code are shown; to view more NC
code as the program runs, select the NC MONITOR F6 softkey. The bottom portion of the
screen is reserved for program status and error messages.

These are the fields on the Auto Mode Monitoring screen:

• Zone (dual-zone machines only)—displays the current zone.


• Machine and Part Axes—displays the current position of all axes.
• Opt Stop On (Off)—displays the status (on or off) of the Optional Stop for
NC programs.
• Chip Removal—displays the status of the chip auger.
• Tool in Spindle—displays the tool number of the tool in the spindle.
• Spindle—displays the current spindle speed.
• Feed—displays the current feed rate.
• Program Run Time—displays the time the program has been running.
• F(%)—displays the current Feedrate per Minute percentage set on the axis
Feed Rate knob.
• R(%)—displays the current Rapid Traverse Feedrate percentage set on the
Rapid override knob.
• S(%)—displays the current spindle RPM percentage set on the Spindle
Speed override knob.
• Axis Limit Switches—displays the status of the machine’s limit switches as
each axis calibrates.
• Spindle Load Monitor—displays the percentage of full load on each axis as
the program runs. The load is displayed in a bar graph format, with colors
progressing from green to yellow to red to indicate the percentage of load

4 - 56 Programming Basics 704-0116-110 Getting Started with WinMax Mill


from 0 to 150%.
• Block—displays the current program block.
• Part Count—displays the number of times the program was executed.

5 lines of
Spindle Load NC code
Monitor

Figure 4–6. Auto Mode Monitoring screen

These are the monitoring softkeys that may be available for Auto Cycle mode:

• Reset Part Count F1—the number of times a program was executed. To


return this value to zero when a new program starts, touch the Reset Part
Count softkey.
• Chip Removal Forward On/Off F2— turn the chip auger in the forward
(clockwise) direction on or off. This selection is saved when the Interrupt
button is pressed or after the program has finished running. If a stop
condition or mode change is made before restarting a new part program or
exiting the interrupt cycle, the saved information is cleared. This softkey is
only available if your machining center uses a chip auger.
• Optional Stop On/Off F3—pauses the program and shuts off the spindle.
This softkey functions only with NC programs. When Optional Stop is On, the
M01 code in the NC program will be processed; when Optional Stop is Off, the
M01 code is ignored.
• Select DRO F4—change the size of the digital read out (DRO) on the screen.
From the Select DRO screen you can see machine information displayed in
either Full Status or Full DRO. Full Status displays the current location of
machine and part axes, as well as other machine information. Full DRO
displays the current location of machine and part axes, Distance to Go and
other machine information (with abbreviated categories). The current zone is
also displayed (dual-zone machines only).
• Coolant Washdown On/Off F5—turn the coolant washdown on or off for
washing chips from the enclosure.
• NC Monitor F6—displays a pop-up window containing the current NC code.
This feature allows you to view the code as the program runs; the program

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-110 Programming Basics 4-57


name appears in the Current Program Name box at the bottom of the
monitor. The line of code that is currently being machined is identified in red.
When the “Show Modals” boxed is checked, the current active modals are
shown. As machining progresses, the monitor will scroll through the lines of
code. Select the “Close” button at the bottom of the window to close the NC
Monitor.
• Toggle Rapid Override Enable F7—enable or disable the ability to override
the programmed rapid traverse using the Rapid Override console knob.
• Worklight On/Off F8—turn the enclosure worklight on or off. This softkey is
only available if your machining center is equipped with an enclosure
worklight.

Manual Mode
Manual mode controls machine settings and operations. The top part of the screen
displays the DRO. See Digital Read Out (DRO), on page 4 - 10 for more information.

These are the softkeys for Manual mode:

• Tool Management F1—Access tool information for Spindle, Auto Tools, and
Manual Tools.
• Manual Function Setup F2— Set manual spindle speed and jog feed,
retract tool, execute a manual rapid move, turn washdown coolant on and off,
and turn worklight on and off from this screen.
• Diagnostics F3— Access the CE Status & Diagnostics screen and the ATC &
Machine Diagnostics screen. See Manual Safety Override Mode, on page 4 -
79 and ATC and Machine Diagnostics, on page 4 - 65 for more information.
• Park Machine F4—Center the table and leave the spindle at the home
position.
• Warm Up Machine F5—Warm up an idle machine.
• Orient Spindle F6—Ensures that the Z axis is at the correct height for a tool
to be inserted in the spindle.
The ORIENT SPINDLE softkey will not function unless the enclosure
doors are completely closed.

• Reset Servos and Spindle F7—Activates only to enable recovery from


certain types of electronic hardware faults such as overloads.
• Calibrate Machine F8—Establish absolute zero for each axis on the
machining center.

Manual Function Setup


The Digital Read Out is displayed at the top of the Manual Function screen. See Digital
Read Out (DRO), on page 4 - 10. Other fields on this screen are:

• Manual Jog Feed—enter the jog feedrate.


• Manual Spindle Speed—enter the spindle speed.

4 - 58 Programming Basics 704-0116-110 Getting Started with WinMax Mill


Softkeys are:

• Retract Tool—retracts the tool.


• Manual Rapid Move—accesses the manual rapid move parameters.
• Washdown Coolant On/Off—turns the washdown coolant on and off.
• Worklight On/Off—turns the worklight on and off.

Manual Rapid Move


Manual Rapid Move executes a single axis rapid move to a specific position at a controlled
feedrate. The operator can enter an axis position, either in machine or part coordinates,
and initiate the move to that position at a specified feedrate.

The DRO is displayed at the top of the screen; see Digital Read Out (DRO), on page 4 -
10. The Manual Rapid Move fields are:

• Coordinate System—specifies the coordinate system for the end position of


the move, either Part or Machine.
• Manual Rapid Feed—specifies the feedrate of a linear axis move.
• Rotary Rapid Feed—specifies the feedrate of a rotary axis move.
• X / Y / Z—specifies the end position of the move in a linear axis.
• A / B / C—specifies the end position of the move in a rotary axis, if equipped
(fields are inactive for a non-rotary machine).

More than one axis end position may be entered, but the move
occurs only on the axis that is selected with the corresponding Rapid
Move softkey.

Softkeys are:

• Rapid Move X—enables the rapid move in X.


• Rapid Move Y—enables the rapid move in Y.
• Rapid Move Z—enables the rapid move in Z.
• Rapid Move A—enables the rapid move in A (softkey is inactive if the
machine is not equipped with a rotary/tilt A axis).
• Rapid Move B—enables the rapid move in B (softkey is inactive if the
machine is not equipped with a rotary/tilt B axis).
• Rapid Move C—enables the rapid move in C (softkey is inactive if the
machine is not equipped with a rotary C axis).

To perform a Manual Rapid Move:

1. In Manual mode, select the Manual Function Setup softkey.


2. Select the Manual Rapid Move softkey. The Manual Rapid Move fields are
displayed. (This softkey is grayed out if the machine is not calibrated.)
3. Select Part or Machine coordinate system from the drop-down Coordinate
System list.
4. Set the linear axis feedrate in the Manual Rapid Feed field. Alternatively, set

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-110 Programming Basics 4-59


the rotary axis feedrate in the Rotary Rapid Feed field.
5. Specify the end position of the move in the appropriate axis field(s).
6. Select the appropriate Rapid Move softkey to enable the move. When the
softkey is selected, a message is displayed that instructs the operator to press
the Start Cycle button to move the axis. When the Start Cycle button is
pressed, the rapid move is performed.
Only one axis move can be performed at a time. During the move, all
other Rapid Move softkeys are disabled until the move is completed.
Once complete, another softkey can be selected, initiating the next
move.

The Rapid Override knob/potentiometer is active during the move.

4 - 60 Programming Basics 704-0116-110 Getting Started with WinMax Mill


Automatic Tool Changer
The ATC for both HTX500 and VTXU machines is a random-pocket tool changer that
tracks tools in the magazine using an ATC Map. All ATC operations require that the servo
power is on, that the machine is calibrated, and that the ATC is at Home position.

Each VMX or VM machining center is equipped with a swing-arm random pocket


Automatic Tool Changer (ATC).

VM Tool Magazine
The station magazine is positioned vertically on the machine. An electronic motor and
helical gear drive the magazine. When activated, the tool magazine operates as described
below:

1. The requested tool pocket rotates 90° to make the tool available for the swing
arm.
2. The swing arm rotates 60° to simultaneously grab the tool in the pocket and
the tool in the spindle.
3. The spindle unclamps.
4. The swing arm moves down to pull the tools out of the pocket and the spindle,
and then rotates 180°.
5. The swing arm moves up and swaps the tools.
6. Finally, the swing arm and tool pocket return to their original positions.

Types of Automatic Tool Changers (ATC)


There are two types of ATCs, which are described in the following sections:

• 40-Taper ATC with 24- or 40-Station Tool Magazine


• 50-Taper ATC with 30- or 32-Station Tool Magazine

40-Taper ATC with 24- or 40-Station Tool Magazine


This tool changer features a magazine with either 24 or 40 tool pockets (stations). The
magazine is positioned vertically on the machine. An electric motor and helical gear drive
the 24- and 40-station magazine. The 24-station magazine is round and the 40-station
magazine is elliptical. Refer to the previous table for the number of tool pockets (stations)
available for a specific machining center.

ATC Sequence
This is the basic sequence of operation of the tool magazine, assuming the magazine is
positioned to the next tool required:

1. The requested tool pocket rotates down 90° to make the tool available for the
swing arm.
2. The swing arm rotates 60° to simultaneously grab both the tool in the pocket
and the tool in the spindle.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-110 Programming Basics 4-61


3. The spindle unclamps.
4. The swing arm moves down to pull the tools out of the pocket and spindle, and
then the arm rotates 180°.
5. The swing arm moves up and swaps the tools.
6. The spindle clamps the new tool in the spindle and the swing arm rotates back
to 0°.
7. The tool pocket moves back to its original position.

Figure 4–7. VMX 40-Taper ATC with 24-station Tool Magazine

4 - 62 Programming Basics 704-0116-110 Getting Started with WinMax Mill


50-Taper ATC with 30 or 32-Station Tool Magazine
The VMX50/50T uses the 50-Taper ATC with a 30-station tool magazine. The VMX64 uses
the 50-Taper ATC with a 32-station tool magazine.

An electric motor, two dogs (cam detents), and three proximity switches control the 50-
Taper tool changer motion. For the VMX64, a free-standing hydraulic unit runs the
rotation of the magazine, magazine locking cylinder, and the tool pot up and down
cylinder. The ATC sequence for the 50-taper ATC is the same as the 40-taper ATC
sequence.

Figure 4–8. VMX 64/50-Taper, 32 Station ATC

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-110 Programming Basics 4-63


HTX500 and VTXU Tool Magazine
The ATC can be operated in Auto or Manual machine mode, using ATC Diagnostics.

HTX500 Machine
For the HTX500 machine, the following steps explain the basic sequence of operation of
the tool magazine, assuming the magazine is positioned to the next tool required.

1. The tool holder rotates to 90°, then the ATC door opens.
2. The exchange arm rotates to 90° and simultaneously grabs the tool in the tool
holder, and if present, the tool in the spindle, if the following conditions are
met:
• The X, Y, and Z axes are at tool change position.
• The spindle is oriented.
3. The spindle unclamps.
4. The exchange arm moves out and simultaneously pulls the tools from the
holder and the spindle, then rotates 180°.
5. The exchange arm moves in and swaps the tools.
6. The exchange arm rotates to 90°.
7. The ATC door closes and the tool holder simultaneously returns to its original
position.

VTXU Machine
The following steps describe the basic sequence of operation of the tool magazine in the
VTXU magazine, assuming the magazine is positioned to the next tool required.

1. The ATC door opens if the following conditions are met:


• The X and Y axes are at tool change position.
• The Z axis is at Height (refer to ATC and Machine Diagnostics, on page 4 -
65 for more information).
• The spindle is oriented.
2. The tool pocket rotates from the Up position to the Down position.
3. The swing arm rotates 90° and simultaneously grabs the tool in the tool
pocket and, if present, the tool in the spindle.
4. The spindle unclamps.
5. The swing arm moves up and swaps the tools, then rotates 180°.
6. The swing arm and tool pocket return to the original positions.
7. The ATC door closes.

4 - 64 Programming Basics 704-0116-110 Getting Started with WinMax Mill


ATC and Machine Diagnostics
The HTX500 machine has separate screens for Machine Diagnostics and ATC Diagnostics.
For all other machines, the ATC and Machine Diagnostics are combined on the ATC &
Machine Diagnostics screen.

HTX500 Machine and ATC Diagnostics


Follow these steps to display the Machine Diagnostic screen for the HTX500 machine:

1. Press the MACHINE MODE MANUAL console key.


2. Select the DIAGNOSTIC F3 softkey.
3. Select the MACHINE DIAGNOSTICS F6 softkey.

Figure 4–9. Machine Diagnostics Screen for HTX500 Machine

These are the status fields on the Machine Diagnostics screen for an HTX500 machine:

• Spindle Status—indicates if the Spindle is Oriented or Not Oriented, and


clamped or unclamped. Oriented is required for ATC to begin.
• Tool in Spindle—indicates the tool number in the Spindle.
• ATC Status—indicates if ATC is in Home position. Home is required for ATC to
begin. Home is defined as ATC Door closed, Exchange Arm at 0°, Tool Holder
at 0°, and Magazine In Pos (1).
• Air Pressure—indicates Pressure OK or Low Pressure. Pressure OK is
required to begin an ATC operation.
• Way Lube Level—indicates Level OK or Low Level. A Low Level alarm will
not allow programs to start running.
• Coolant Status—indicates Level OK and Filter OK. Both are required for tool
coolant operation. Available with the Coolant Through Spindle (CTS) option.
• Hydraulic Status—indicates No Alarm or Alarm. An alarm will not allow
programs to start running.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-110 Programming Basics 4-65


• Spindle Chiller—indicates No Alarm or Alarm. No Alarm is required to begin
an ATC operation.
• Overload Status—indicates Tripped or Not Tripped. Not Tripped is required
to operate the machine.

Display the ATC Diagnostics screen for the HTX500 machine by following these steps:

1. Press the MACHINE MODE MANUAL console key.


2. Select the DIAGNOSTIC F3 softkey.
3. Select the ATC DIAGNOSTICS F7 softkey.

Figure 4–10. HTX500 ATC Diagnostics Screen, Status Condition Fields

HTX500 ATC Status Condition

These are the status condition fields that appear on the ATC DIAGNOSTICS screen. Green
indicators next to fields identify when the status is in the home position.

• Spindle Status—indicates if the Spindle is Oriented or Not Oriented, and


clamped or unclamped. Oriented is required for ATC to begin.
• Tool in Spindle—indicates the tool number in the Spindle.
• ATC Axis Positions—indicates At X, At Y, and At Z positions. All three are
required for ATC to begin.
• Z-Axis Position—indicates At Zero position.
• Magazine Position—indicates the current magazine position (note that this
may not be the tool number).
• ATC Status—indicates if ATC is in Home position. Home is required for ATC
to begin. Home is defined as ATC Door closed, Exchange Arm at 0°, Tool
Holder at 0°, and Magazine In Pos (1).

• Tool Holder—indicates 0° or 90° position. 0° is required for ATC Status


Home.

4 - 66 Programming Basics 704-0116-110 Getting Started with WinMax Mill


• Exchange Arm—indicates 0° or 90° position. 0° is required for ATC Status
Home.
• ATC Door—indicates Closed or Open position. Closed is required for ATC
Status Home.
• Magazine Status—indicates the current magazine position (note that this
may not be the tool number)
• Magazine Pin—indicates Locked or Unlocked Position. Locked is required for
ATC Status Home.
• Hydraulic Status—indicates No Alarm or Alarm. No Alarm is required to
begin an ATC operation.

HTX500 ATC Diagnostics Softkeys

There are three pages of diagnostic softkeys for controlling the ATC operation for HTX500
machines. Pressing the -MORE- softkey changes to either of the other two pages.

When all requirements for a softkey action are met, a prompt displays and the Start Cycle
lamp flashes. Pressing the Start Cycle button executes the command. The Start Cycle
lamp stops flashing during the execution of the command and is turned off when the
command is completed.

Selecting another softkey before pressing the Start Cycle button cancels the pending
command and causes the Start Cycle lamp to cease flashing. If the requirements for a
softkey action are not met, a message displays indicating why the action cannot be
commanded.

• Orient Spindle F1—sets the command to orient the spindle. Oriented is


required to begin an ATC cycle.
• ATC Door Open/Close F2—sets the command to open or close the ATC
Door. Each press of the softkey switches command between open and close.
Must be Closed for ATC to begin.
• Tool Holder 0º/90º F3—sets the command to move the Tool Holder to 0° or
90°. Each press of the softkey switches command between 0° and 90°.
• Exchange Arm 0º / 90º F4—sets the command to move the Exchange Arm
to 0° or 90°. Tool Holder must be at 90°, and ATC Door Open. Once rotated to
90°, the Exchange Arm must be rotated to 180° or jogged back to 0°.
• Spindle Clamp/Unclamp F5—sets the command to clamp or unclamp the
spindle. Each press of the softkey switches the command between clamp and
unclamp.
• Exchange Arm 180º F6—sets the command to move the Exchange Arm
out, rotate 180° and in. Tool Holder must be at 90º and ATC Door Open. Must
be at 0º for ATC to begin.

• Move Axes to TC Position F1—sets the command to move all required axes
to the ATC position.
• Move Z-Axis to Zero F2—sets the command to move the Z-axis to the Zero
position.
• Magazine CW F3—sets the command to move the magazine clockwise one
position.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-110 Programming Basics 4-67


• Magazine CCW F4—sets the command to move the magazine counter-
clockwise one position.
• Calibrate T/C Magazine F6—sets the command to calibrate the magazine.
The magazine will rotate to the Reference Pos.
• IO Maps F1—displays the softkey selections for I/O boards in the control.
See below for more information.
• Exchange Arm Jog Reversal F2—sets the command to pulse jog the
Exchange Arm in the reverse direction. Once initiated continue selecting until
the Exchange Arm is at 0° or 90°.

HTX 500 I/O Maps

Selecting the I/O MAPS F1 softkey on the ATC Diagnostics screen displays softkey
selections for I/O boards in the control. Each of the softkeys identifies I/O boards in the
control. Select one of the softkeys to display a list of inputs and outputs on the board and
their active or enabled state. The boards are abbreviated as follows:

• IOIF - Input/Output Interface Board


• DCI/01 - DC Input Output #1 Board
• DCI/02 - DC Input Output #2 Board
• DCI/03 - DC Input Output #3 Board

The Inputs and Outputs are listed by board connector, either J1 or J2. The outputs cannot
be activated nor can the inputs be tested.

Each displayed I/O map includes both the input and output signal identifier list. The input
and output signals are highlighted when the signal is activated or enabled. Refer to the
machine Parts Listing and Wiring Diagram manual for schematics and harnesses that
identify the signals and boards.

4 - 68 Programming Basics 704-0116-110 Getting Started with WinMax Mill


VM, VMX, and VTXU ATC & Machine Diagnostics
Display the ATC & Machine Diagnostics screen for these machines by following these
steps:

1. Press the MACHINE MODE MANUAL console key.


2. Select the DIAGNOSTIC F3 softkey.
3. Select the ATC & MACHINE DIAGNOSTICS F7 softkey.

Figure 4–11. ATC & Machine Diagnostics Screen, Page 1

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-110 Programming Basics 4-69


ATC & Machine Diagnostics Input Fields
The following descriptions are for the status of inputs for the ATC for VM, VMX, and VTXU
machines.

• Spindle Status—indicates if the Spindle is Oriented or Not Oriented.


Oriented is required for ATC to begin.
• Spindle Clamp—indicates if the Spindle is clamped or unclamped.
• ATC Z Axis Position—indicates Z is at Machine Tool Change Height.
• ATC Position (VTXU only)—indicates Z At Height and X/Y At Position.
• ATC Status—indicates if ATC is in Home position. Home is required for ATC
to begin. Home is defined as ATC Door closed (VTXU), Exchange Arm at 0°,
Tool Holder at UP, and Magazine In Pos #1.
• ATC Door Status (VTXU only)—Indicates the status of the ATC door on the
VTXU machine.
• Tool Holder—indicates Up or Down position. Up is required for ATC Status
Home.
• Exchange Arm—indicates 0° or 60° position. 0° is required for ATC Status
Home.
• Cannot move from 0° to 60° unless Z-axis is at Tool Change Height, Tool
Pocket is Down, Spindle is Oriented and Clamped.
• Cannot move from 60° to 0° unless Z-axis is at Tool Change Height, Tool
Pocket is Down, and Spindle is Clamped.

• Magazine Lock—indicates Locked or Unlocked Position. Locked is required


for ATC to begin.
• Magazine Status—indicates the current magazine position (note that this
may not be the tool number).

• Magazine In Position—indicates In Pos (1) or In Pos (2).


• In Pos (1) is required for ATC Status Home.
• In Pos (2) is active when magazine is rotating and not in position.

• Magazine Reference—indicates Reference Pos when the ATC calibration


sensor is detected.
• ATC OK to Stop—indicates Off or On. On is set during Load Arm rotation and
disables the Load Arm motor and enables the brake. Off should be set when
Load Arm is at 0 degrees or 60 degrees.
• Start Pushbutton—indicates Off or On. On is displayed when the Start Cycle
button is pressed.
• Spindle Unclamp PB—indicates Off or On. On is displayed when the Spindle
Unclamp button is pressed.
• Way Lube Level—indicates OK or Low Level. A Low Level alarm will not
allow programs to start running.
• Air Pressure—indicates OK or Low Pressure. OK is required to begin an ATC
operation.

4 - 70 Programming Basics 704-0116-110 Getting Started with WinMax Mill


VM, VMX, and VTXU ATC & Machine Diagnostics Softkeys

When all requirements for a softkey action are met, a prompt displays and the Start Cycle
lamp flashes. Pressing the Start Cycle button executes the command. The Start Cycle
lamp stops flashing during the execution of the command and is turned off when the
command is completed.

Selecting another softkey before pressing the Start Cycle button cancels the pending
command and causes the Start Cycle lamp to cease flashing. If the requirements for a
softkey action are not met, a message displays indicating why the action cannot be
commanded.

These are the ATC & Machine Diagnostics softkeys. Some softkeys may not be present on
all machines or may appear in a different order:

• Orient Spindle—sets the command to orient the spindle. Oriented is


required to begin an ATC cycle.
• Tool Holder Up / Down—sets the command to move the Tool Holder Down
or Up. Each press of the softkey switches command between Down and Up.
• Exchange Arm 0º / 60º (90º for VTXU)—sets the command to move the
Load Arm to 0° or 60° (90°). Tool Pocket must be Z-axis at Tool Change
Height, Spindle Clamped, and Oriented Down before moving to 60° (90°).
Each press of the softkey switches command between 0° and 60° (90°).
• Spindle Clamp / Unclamp—sets the command to clamp or unclamp the
spindle. Each press of the softkey switches the command between clamp and
unclamp.
• Exchange Arm Rotate—sets the command to move the Exchange Arm
down, rotate 180° and up. Tool Pocket must be Down, Load Arm must be at
60°, and spindle must be unclamped.

• Move Z-Axis to T/C Height—sets the command to move the Z-axis to the
Tool Change Height position. Z-axis must be At Height for ATC to begin.
• Move Z-Axis to Zero—sets the command to move the Z-axis to the Zero
position.
• Magazine Pin Lock / Unlock—sets the command to lock or unlock the
magazine pin. Locked is required for ATC to begin.
• Magazine CW—sets the command to move the magazine clockwise one
position.
• Magazine CCW—sets the command to move the magazine counter-
clockwise one position.
• Calibrate T/C Magazine—sets the command to calibrate the magazine.
Magazine will rotate to the Reference Pos.

• Exchange Arm Jog Reverse—sets the command to pulse jog the exchange
arm in the reverse direction. Pulse commands will stop once the Exchange
Arm is at 0 degree.
• ATC Door Open / Close (VTXU only)—sets the command to open or close
the ATC Door on the VTXU machine. Each press of the softkey switches
command between open and close. Must be Closed for ATC to begin.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-110 Programming Basics 4-71


• Move Axes to T/C Position—sets the command to move all required axes
to the ATC position.

HTX Automatic Pallet Changer


The Automatic Pallet Changer (APC) system is standard on HTX500 machining centers.
Equipped with two pallets, the APC provides the ability to set up a job on one pallet while
a job is being machined on the other pallet.

The APC table must be squared before any operation can occur. Refer
to Squaring the APC Table, on page 4 - 72 for instructions for
squaring the APC table.

This is the basic sequence of operation of the APC:

1. The APC Pin unlocks and the APC Clamp unclamps.


2. The APC table raises and rotates 180°. Hydraulic solenoids ensure the table
rotates in the proper direction.
The APC table does not rotate through 360°, but rotates in the
opposite direction to return to its previous position.

3. The APC table lowers into position.


4. The APC Clamp clamps and the APC Pin locks.
Only a Hurco-certified Service Engineer can make adjustments to the
APC Table.

Squaring the APC Table


The APC table is not automatically squared during machine calibration. Therefore, the
APC table must be squared before it can be used. Follow these steps to square the APC
table:

1. Press the MACHINE MODE MANUAL console key.


2. Select the DIAGNOSTICS F3 softkey.
3. Select the PALLET CHANGER DIAGNOSTICS F5 softkey to access the APC
DIAGNOSTICS screen.
4. Select the MOVE Z-AXIS TO ZERO F1 softkey to position the Z-axis at Zero.
5. Select the SQUARE PALLET FOR ROTATION F2 softkey and press the Cycle
Start button. The APC table will rotate into the proper position for the pallet
exchange cycle.
If the B-axis is away from the squared position, selecting the
SQUARE PALLET FOR ROTATION F2 softkey rotates the table at
the maximum RPM back to the squared location.

4 - 72 Programming Basics 704-0116-110 Getting Started with WinMax Mill


Operating the APC
The APC can be operated in Auto mode within a Conversational or NC part program.

Follow these steps to operate the APC in a Conversational program:

1. On any Conversational part programming data block, select the


MISCELLANEOUS F5 softkey.
2. Select the MACHINE FUNCTION F5 softkey to display the Machine Function
screen.
3. Select the SHOW M CODE LIST pop-up box to display the M Code List. The
following M Codes are used to operate the APC (use the scroll bar to view more
M codes, if necessary):
• M51 Cycle Pallet Changer—requires confirmation from the Operator
before an pallet change cycle is initiated (see details below).
• M56 Cycle APC W/O Confirm—complete a pallet change cycle without
confirmation from the Operator.
• M57 APC Pos 1 W/O Confirm—place Pallet 1 in the machine without
confirmation from the Operator.
• M58 APC Pos 2 W/O Confirm—place Pallet 2 in the machine without
confirmation from the Operator.

Figure 4–12. Machine Function Screen with M Code List

Using M51 does not require indicating whether Pallet 1 or 2 is in the machining setup
area. Before M51 will initiate the APC cycle, the front enclosure doors must be closed and
the Workzone Confirmation pushbutton pressed.

• If the front enclosure doors are open when the M51 operation is requested,
the program will be in a Feed Hold state and a message to close the front
enclosure doors will be displayed. Close the doors and press the Workzone
Confirmation pushbutton to continue the part program.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-110 Programming Basics 4-73


• If the Workzone Confirmation pushbutton has not been pressed when the
M51 operation is requested, the program will be in a Feed Hold state with the
following message displayed, “Pallet setup confirmation required to cycle
pallet changer.” Press the Workzone Confirmation and Cycle Start
pushbuttons on the remote APC Panel to continue the program.
Pressing Feed Hold during a pallet change cycle will stop the cycle.
Releasing Feed Hold will resume the cycle. However, Feed Hold
followed by Spindle Off (or the Stop Cycle button) during a pallet
change cycle will abort the program and the pallet change cycle. The
APC must be returned to the home position using the Pallet Changer
Diagnostics before an Auto program can be run again.

Refer to the NC Programming Manual for instructions on operating the APC within an NC
program.

APC Diagnostics
Follow these steps to access the APC Diagnostics screen:

1. Press the MACHINE MODE MANUAL console key.


2. Select the DIAGNOSTICS F3 softkey.
3. Select the PALLET CHANGER DIAGNOSTICS F5 softkey.

Figure 4–13. APC Diagnostics Screen

APC Status Conditions

The APC Diagnostics screen displays the status of inputs for the APC system.

• APC Position—indicates whether APC table is in the Up or Down position.


• Pallet in Machine—indicates whether the APC table Position 1 or 2 is in the
machining area.

4 - 74 Programming Basics 704-0116-110 Getting Started with WinMax Mill


• APC Pin—indicates whether the APC Pin is Locked or Unlocked. The APC Pin
must Unlock before the APC table can be lifted and rotated and Locked to
complete the cycle.
• APC Decel Sw—indicates whether the Position 1 or 2 switch was seen during
rotation. This switch enables low-speed rotation before the APC table
completes the 180º rotation.
• APC Reference—indicates whether the Manual Table Release Lever is in the
Reference Pos or has been retracted. The Manual Table Release Lever must be
at Reference Pos to begin an APC cycle.
• Hydraulic Status—indicates either OK or Alarm. Must be OK to begin an APC
cycle.
• Z-Axis Position—indicates if the Z-axis is At Zero (calibration point). Must
be At Zero to begin an APC cycle.
• ATC Status—indicates if the ATC table is Home. Must be Home to begin APC
cycle.
• Pallet Status—indicates Pallet Squared. Must be Pallet Squared to begin an
APC cycle.

APC Diagnostics Softkeys

The APC Diagnostic softkeys are functional only when Servo Power is On and the machine
is calibrated. These are the APC Diagnostic softkeys.

• Move Z Axis to Zero Position F1—sets the command to move the Z-axis to
the zero position.
• Square Pallet for Rotation F2—sets the command to square the pallet.
• Cycle Pallet Changer F3—sets the command to complete a full rotation of
the APC Table (all eight steps of the basic sequence of operation).
• Raise Pallet Changer F4—sets the command to lift the APC Table to the Up
position. The APC table must be squared and the APC table must not be Up.
• Rotate APC to Position 1 F5—sets the command to rotate the APC table to
place Position 1 inside the machining area. The APC table must be squared
and in the raised position, and Position 1 must not be in the machining area.
• Rotate APC to Position 2 F6—sets the command to rotate the APC table to
place Position 2 inside the machining area. The APC table must be squared
and in the raised position, and Position 2 must not be in the machining area.
• Lower Pallet Changer F7—sets the command to lower the APC table to the
Down position. APC table must be squared and the table must not be Down.

When all requirements for a softkey action are met, a prompt displays and the Start Cycle
lamp flashes. Pressing the Start Cycle button executes the command. The Start Cycle
lamp stops flashing during execution of the command and is turned off when the
command is completed.

Selecting another softkey before pressing the Start Cycle button cancels the pending
command and causes the Start Cycle lamp to cease flashing. If requirements for a
softkey action are not met, a message displays indicating why the action cannot be
commanded.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-110 Programming Basics 4-75


Manually Operate the APC from the Load Station
The remote APC Panel (shown in the figure below) is located on the front of the machine
enclosure, below the front enclosure doors. The APC Panel is used to manually raise and
lower the APC table, and to rotate between Position 1 and Position 2.

Figure 4–14. Remote APC Panel

Remote APC Panel Pushbuttons

These are the Remote APC Panel pushbuttons, from left to right.

• Emergency Stop—disables all axis servo drives and stops all moves of the
pallet changer.
• Cycle Start—initiates a selected operation that runs until it is completed.
The Cycle Start pushbutton flashes while the operation is pending, is steady
when the operation is in process, and turns off when the operation is
completed.
• Cycle Stop—cancels any pending operation (if the Cycle Start lamp is
flashing, it will turn off). Pressing the Cycle Start pushbutton after an
operation is cancelled by the Cycle Stop pushbutton results in no APC motion.
• Workzone Confirmation Or Ready to Rotate—this pushbutton is not
functional for manual pallet changer operations.
The console’s Start Cycle pushbutton flashes when the Hydraulic Lift,
APC Table Rotate to Position 1, or APC Table Rotate to Position 2
pushbutton is illuminated and the Cycle Start pushbutton is flashing.
Pressing the console’s Stop Cycle pushbutton cancels the operation.

• Hydraulic Lift—commands the APC table to be lifted or lowered and displays


a message, depending on the current position of the APC table:
• If the APC table is in the Down position, an “APC unit will raise” message
displays on the console.
• If the APC table is in the Up position, an “APC unit will lower” message
displays on the console.
When the Hydraulic Lift pushbutton is pressed, it illuminates and the Cycle
Start lamp flashes. The operation will not begin until the Cycle Start
pushbutton is pressed.

The Hydraulic Lift pushbutton will no longer be illuminated when the


operation is completed or if the Cycle Stop pushbutton is pressed.

4 - 76 Programming Basics 704-0116-110 Getting Started with WinMax Mill


• APC Table Rotate to Position 1—if the external pallet is Pallet 1,
commands the APC table to rotate Pallet 1 into the machining area. The APC
table must be in the Up position for APC Table Rotate to Position 1 to
complete.
Pressing the APC Table Rotate to Position 1 pushbutton causes the Cycle Start
pushbutton to flash and an “APC unit will rotate to position 1” message to
display on the console. The operation will not begin until the Cycle Start
pushbutton is pressed.

The APC Table Rotate to Position 1 will no longer be illuminated when the
operation is completed or if the Cycle Stop pushbutton is pressed.

• APC Table Rotate to Position 2—if the external pallet is Pallet 2,


commands the APC table to rotate Pallet 2 into the machining area. The APC
table must be in the Up position for APC Table Rotate to Position 2 to
complete.
Pressing the APC Table Rotate to Position 2 pushbutton causes the Cycle Start
pushbutton to flash and an “APC unit will rotate to position 2” message to
display on the console. The operation will not begin until the Cycle Start
pushbutton is pressed.

The APC Table Rotate to Position 2 will no longer be illuminated when the
operation is completed or if the Cycle Stop pushbutton is pressed.

The following conditions must be met before initiating a manual


pallet changer operation from the load station:

• The machine must be calibrated and in Manual machine mode.


• Servo power must be on.
• ATC must be in the Home position.
• Z-axis position must be AT ZERO.
• HYDRAULIC STATUS must be No Alarm.
• Front enclosure doors must be closed and the pallet must be
squared. Refer to Squaring the APC Table, on page 4 - 72 for
instruction on squaring the APC table.

Follow these steps to initiate a manual pallet changer operation from the load station:

1. Press the Hydraulic Lift button on the Remote APC panel. The button lights and
the Cycle Start lamp flashes.
2. Press the Cycle Start button:
a. The APC table raises and the Cycle Start button stops flashing, but remains
lit.
b. When the APC table is in the Up position, both the Hydraulic Lift and Cycle
Start buttons are no longer lit.
3. Press the APC Table Rotate To Position 1 button. The APC Table Rotate To
Position 1 button lights and the Cycle Start button flashes.
4. Press the Cycle Start button:
a. The APC table begins a 180° high-speed rotation, followed by low-speed
rotation into position.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-110 Programming Basics 4-77


b. The Cycle Start button stops flashing, but remains lit.
c. When the APC table is in position, both the Cycle Start and APC Table
Rotate To Position 1 buttons are no longer lit.
5. Press the Hydraulic Lift button on the Remote APC panel. The Hydraulic Lift
button lights and the Cycle Start button flashes.
6. Press the Cycle Start button:
a. The APC table lowers and the Cycle Start button stops flashing.
b. When the APC is in the Down position, both the Cycle Start and Hydraulic
Lift buttons are no longer lit.

Manual APC Table Rotation


Near the front of the APC table is a Manual Table Release Lever. This lever provides the
input for the APC Pin Lock. To manually rotate the table without using the remote APC
Panel, pull the Release Lever out. This allows the APC table to be rotated by hand for part
setup. After rotating the APC table, the arrows on the pallet must be aligned with the
arrows on the APC table’s platform before executing a pallet exchange.

The APC table must be in Down position before using the Manual
Table Release Lever to manually rotate the table.

Failure to align arrows prior to executing a pallet exchange can result


in the APC table not positioning correctly in the machining area.

4 - 78 Programming Basics 704-0116-110 Getting Started with WinMax Mill


Manual Safety Override Mode
For machines with CE safety circuit switches enabled, the Manual Safety Override mode
allows the enclosure doors to be opened when the system is in Manual mode so the
operator or supervisor can perform limited manual machine operations.

While the doors are open, manual jog feed is restricted. The jog feed is limited to 2
meters per minute, or approximately 80 inches per minute, with manual safety override
enabled. No jogging is permitted with manual safety override disabled.

Manual operations that cannot be started with the doors open,


regardless of manual safety override mode, are:

• Spindle On
• Park Machine
• Warm Up Machine
• Calibrate Machine
• Spindle Orient
• Chip Removal
• Tool Changer Functions

When the Manual Safety Override mode is enabled, it remains enabled until control power
is turned off, the Emergency Stop button is pressed, or machine power is turned off. A
fault will disable the Manual Safety Override mode also.

If you try to jog the axes with the doors open without enabling the manual safety
override mode, a prompt appears to cycle the keyswitch or enter the access code to
enable jog.

CE Diagnostics
To enable the Safety Override mode, access the CE Status & Diagnostics screen.

1. From the Manual mode screen, select the Diagnostics softkey.


2. Select the CE Diagnostics softkey. The following screen appears:

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-110 Programming Basics 4-79


Figure 4–15. CE Status & Diagnostics Screen

The fields on the CE Status & Diagnostics screen are defined as follows:

• CE Configuration—Displays CE logic configuration. Enabled or disabled in


Integrator Support Services.
• Door Lock Status—Displays status of all doors with CE safety circuit
switches Unlocked or Locked. The Door Switch Status must be Closed when
the Door Lock Status is Locked.
• Door Switch Status—Displays status as Closed or Open. The switch must
be Closed when the Door Lock Status is Locked.
• Limited Manual Operations—Displays status as Disabled or Enabled.
Status is Enabled after entering an access code. Enabled allows limited safe
motion with the doors open.
• EIR Relay State—Displays status as Disabled or Enabled. When enabled,
the enclosure doors have been locked due to a process request or an active
process.

Entering the Access Code


A numeric access code is required to enable Limited Manual Operations. Follow these
steps to enter the access code:

1. Select the Enter Access Code softkey. A message appears with a prompt for
entering a 4 digit code.
2. Enter a numeric code using the console keypad. Asterisks (*) appear
representing each entered digit. When the fourth digit is entered, the asterisks
and message disappear.
Using a non-numeric key cancels the operation.

When the code is successfully entered, the Limited Manual Operations feature is enabled,

4 - 80 Programming Basics 704-0116-110 Getting Started with WinMax Mill


as indicated in the status field.

For initial setup of the Access Code, the user is prompted to enter a new code and then to
enter the same code a second time before it is accepted.

Changing an Existing Access Code


To change an existing access code, follow these steps:

1. Select the Change Access Code softkey. A message appears asking you to
enter the current code.
2. Enter the current numeric code from the console keypad. A message appears
asking you to enter the new code.
3. Enter the new code. A message appears asking you to re-enter the new code
for confirmation.
• If the new code is not re-entered, the code is not changed.
• When the new code is verified, the code will change and a message
appears to confirm the action.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-110 Programming Basics 4-81


Graphics
WinMax graphics include Toolpath and Solid Graphics, on page 4 - 83. Real-time graphic
animation is available with the Runtime tool, which shows a simulated tool cutting the
part on screen while the machine is cutting the actual part.

Solid graphics and Runtime tool are only available with the
Advanced Verification Graphics option.

Graphics Settings
Graphics preferences are set in the Graphics Settings screen, which is accessed with the
GRAPHICS SETTINGS F8 softkey. The Graphics Settings screen shows the following:

Display Properties
Fields on the Display tab are:

• SHOW GRAPHICS—set the type, either Show All, Toolpath, or Solids.


• TOOL PATH—specify Yes or No to show the tool path (appears as red dashed
line).
• PART SURFACE—specify Yes or No to show the part surface (appears as
solid cyan line).
• RAPIDS—specify Yes or No to show rapid moves (appears as yellow solid
lines).
• STOCK OUTLINE—specify Yes or No to show the stock outline, which is set
in the stock geometry screen (appears as green solid line). Refer to the
“Stock Geometry” section in Part Setup for more information.
• PLUNGES—specify Yes or No to show plunge moves (appears as purple
lines).
• ENABLE RUNTIME TOOL DISPLAY—specify Yes or No to see simulated tool
move around the part while the machine is running; tool also shown when
jogging tool near part.
• BACKGROUND COLOR—choose Black or White background color.
• DEFAULT VIEW—set the default view when WinMax is started, either XY
plane, XZ plane, Isometric, or All Views.
• DEFAULT ZONE (dual-zone machines)—set the zone initially displayed in
graphics when the application is started.

Performance Properties
Fields on the Performance tab are:

• SHOW PECKS OF CONTOURS—specify Yes or No to show all the roughing


tool path, applies only to Toolpath graphics.
• SHOW PECKS OF 3D SURFACES—specify Yes or No to show all the pecks
during milling of 3D mold and swept surface blocks.
• USE CHORD ERROR FROM PROGRAM—specify Yes or No to use the chord

4 - 82 Programming Basics 704-0116-110 Getting Started with WinMax Mill


error value programmed in general parameters when rendering curves in NC.
• GRAPHICS CHORD ERROR—enter the chord error to be used when drawing
curves in graphics.
• SOLIDS GRAPHICS OPTIMIZATION—specify None, Display Lists, or
Vertex Buffer.
• WIRE GRAPHICS OPTIMIZATION—specify Display Lists or Vertex Buffer.
• REFRESH SPEED—choose the refresh speed for graphics rendering. Choose
one of seven options between fastest speed (Fastest Completion) to
smoothest rendering (Smoothest).

Axis Configuration
Select the program type and axis settings in this tab to optimize graphics viewing.

Toolpath and Solid Graphics

Toolpath graphics displays a wireframe view of the part. Toolpath is also animated to
show the tool in motion if the runtime tool is displayed (only available with the Advanced
Verification Graphics option).

Solid graphics displays a solid 3-dimensional part; only available with the Advanced
Verification Graphics option.

Denotes the
view selected

Indicates
the stage of
processing

Figure 4–16. Solid graphic display

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-110 Programming Basics 4-83


The console Draw button initiates drawing. The Draw Options menu is displayed (for both
Toolpath and Solid) to control drawing and animation:

• DRAW OPTIONS F1—displays the following draw options:


• DRAW (PAUSE) F1—starts drawing the part. When drawing is in
progress, the softkey displays PAUSE—select it to pause the drawing.
When paused, the softkey displays DRAW—select it to resume drawing.
• ACCELERATED DRAW F2—displays only the completed drawing without
showing each block as it is drawn. There may be a delay before the
completed drawing appears on screen; selecting the SHOW PROGRESS F2
softkey displays the drawing at the current point each time the softkey is
selected.
• SINGLE STEP F3—displays only one step or program block at a time.
Subsequent selection of SINGLE STEP will execute the next step or block.
• NEXT TOOL CHANGE F4—displays cutting from one tool change to the
next.
• SELECT VIEW F2—choose XY plane, XZ plane, YZ plane, Isometric, or All
Views.
• ZOOM F3—magnifies an area of the graphic. Select the softkey and choose
one of the following:
• ZOOM IN F1—magnify incrementally by 20% each time the softkey is
selected.
• ZOOM OUT F2—shrink view incrementally by 10% each time the softkey
is selected.
• FIT TO VIEW F3—returns drawing to full view.
• “Touch-and-drag”—place stylus at a point on the screen and drag it to
expand the box over the area you wish to magnify. When stylus is lifted
from screen the area will be magnified.

• PAN F4—moves the graphic up, down, left, or right. Use the softkeys or
touch the screen and drag the graphic.
• ROTATE F5—changes the rotation of the graphic.
• DB SEARCH F6—jumps to a selected data block. Select the softkey, touch an
area on the graphic touchscreen, and select the JUMP TO BLOCK softkey.
• SNAPSHOT F7—creates an image of the solid that is stored with the HWM
file. The image is displayed on the Program Manager screen when the
program is highlighted.
• GRAPHICS SETTINGS F8—displays the Graphics Settings screen.

4 - 84 Programming Basics 704-0116-110 Getting Started with WinMax Mill


RECORD OF CHANGES
704-0116-110rB, February 2010

Revised by: H. Arle

Approved by: D. Skrzypczak, February 2010

Changes

• Updates to reflect software changes.

704-0116-110rA, December 2009

Revised by: H. Arle

Approved by: D. Skrzypczak, December 2009

Changes

• Added Tool Change Optimization content.


• Added Manual Rapid Move content.
• Revisions to Absolute Tool section.
• Updates to reflect software changes from v7.3.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-110 Record of Changes — 1


2 - Record of Changes 704-0116-110 Getting Started with WinMax Mill
APC Pin 4 - 75
INDEX APC Position 4 - 74
APC Reference 4 - 75
ATC Status 4 - 75
Hydraulic Status 4 - 75
Numerics Pallet in Machine 4 - 74
10-base T 1 - 22 Pallet Status 4 - 75
24-station 4 - 62 Z-Axis Position 4 - 75
APC Diagnostics softkeys
Cycle Pallet Changer F3 4 - 75
A Lower Pallet Changer F7 4 - 75
A Centerline Move Z Axis to Zero Position F1 4 - 75
X/Y/ Z field 4 - 8 Raise Pallet Changer F4 4 - 75
A Offset softkey 4 - 51 Rotate APC to Position 1 F5 4 - 75
Abort Port Operation softkey, Serial I/O Rotate APC to Position 2 F6 4 - 75
screen 3 - 34 Square Pallet for Rotation F2 4 - 75
Absolute Tool Length mode 4 - 15 APC Pin, APC diagnostics 4 - 75
ACCELERATED DRAW F2 softkey, graphics APC Position, APC diagnostics 4 - 74
screen 4 - 84 APC Reference, APC diagnostics 4 - 75
access code 4 - 80 APC Table Rotate to Position 1 pushbutton,
changing 4 - 81 Remote APC panel 4 - 77
Active Error Listing 3 - 35 APC Table Rotate to Position 2 pushbutton,
Active Status Listing 3 - 35 Remote APC panel 4 - 77
Add As Manual Tool softkey APC table, manual rotation 4 - 78
Tool Review screen 4 - 33 Append Tool and Material Database soft-
Unmatched Tools Review 4 - 33 key, Import and Export 3 - 10
ADD MATERIAL F1 softkey, Tool and Mate- APPLICATION FONT SIZE, User Interface
rial Database screen 4 - 37 Settings 3 - 4
ADD TOOL F1 softkey, Tool and Material arrow keys 1 - 14
Database 4 - 37 ATC 1 - 24, 4 - 61
Advanced Tool Settings 4 - 23 large tools 1 - 26
softkey 4 - 23 loading 1 - 25
Air Pressure tool removal 1 - 26
ATC and machine diagnostics 4 - 70 ATC & Machine Diagnostics Softkeys 4 - 71
machine diagnostics, HTCX500 4 - 65 ATC Axis Positions, ATC diagnostics,
Alias field, FTP Host Properties screen 2 - 7 HTX500 4 - 66
Alt Dwell Lt Side, machine parameters 3 - ATC Diagnostics screen
16 ATC Axis Positions, HTX500 4 - 66
Alt Washdown Dwell, machine parameters ATC Door, HTX500 4 - 67
3 - 15 ATC Status, HTX500 4 - 66
Alt Washdown Off Time, machine parame- Exchange Arm, HTX500 4 - 67
ters 3 - 17 Hydraulic Status, HTX500 4 - 67
Angle field Magazine Pin, HTX500 4 - 67
Advanced Tool Settings 4 - 25 Magazine Position, HTX500 4 - 66
APC 4 - 72 Magazine Status, HTX500 4 - 67
diagnostics 4 - 74 Spindle Status, HTX500 4 - 66
initiate manual pallet change from load Tool Holder, HTX500 4 - 66
station 4 - 77 Tool in Spindle, HTX500 4 - 66
Machine Function screen 4 - 73 Z-Axis Position, HTX500 4 - 66
Manual Table Release lever 4 - 78 ATC Diagnostics softkeys
squaring the table 4 - 72 ATC Door Open / Close F2, HTX500 4 -
APC Decel Sw, APC diagnostics 4 - 75 67
APC Diagnostics screen Calibrate T/C Magazine F6, HTX500 4 -
APC Decel Sw 4 - 75 68

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-110 Index — 1


Exchange Arm 0° / 90° F5, HTX500 4 - AutoSave Settings 3 - 31
67 softkey, Utilities screen 3 - 6
Exchange Arm 180° F6, HTX500 4 - 67 Aux Output Confirmation Enable, machine
Exchange Arm Jog Reverse F2, HTX500 parameters 3 - 25
4 - 68 Auxiliary
IO Maps, HTX500 4 - 68 console key 1 - 14
Magazine CCW F4, HTX500 4 - 68 Mode 3 - 1
Magazine CW F3, HTX500 4 - 67 Auxiliary Work Offsets 4 - 12
Move Axes to TC Position F1, HTX500 Axes Status field, DRO 4 - 10
4 - 67 axis
Move Z-Axis to Zero F2, HTX500 4 - 67 control 1 - 15
Orient Spindle F1, HTX500 4 - 67 select switch 1 - 17
Spindle Clamp / Unclamp F5, HTX500 Axis Feed Rate dial 1 - 15
4 - 67 Axis Feedrate Override Min (%) parameter
Tool Holder 0° / 90° F3, HTX500 4 - 67 3 - 29
ATC Disable, machine parameters 3 - 22 Axis Limit Switches field
ATC Door Open / Close F2, ATC diagnostics Auto Mode 4 - 56
softkey, HTX500 4 - 67 DRO 4 - 11
ATC Door Open / Close softkey, ATC and Axis, spindle, and machine control
machine diagnostics 4 - 71 location on console 1 - 11
ATC Door, ATC and machine diagnostics 4 - Axis, spindle, and machine control, location
70 on console 1 - 12
ATC Door, ATC diagnostics, HTX500 4 - 67
ATC Input Fields, ATC and machine diag-
nostics 4 - 70 B
ATC OK to Stop, ATC and machine diagnos- B Centerline X/Y/Z field 4 - 8
tics 4 - 70 B Offset softkey 4 - 51
ATC Position field, ATC and machine diag- Backup Config & Machine Files 3 - 3
nostics 4 - 70 softkey 3 - 2
ATC Status, APC diagnostics 4 - 75 Base 1 - 2
ATC Status, ATC and machine diagnostics Baud Rate field, Serial Port Settings 3 - 30
4 - 70 Begin Reading from Port softkey, Serial I/O
ATC Status, ATC diagnostics, HTX500 4 - screen 3 - 34
66 Begin Writing to Port softkey, Serial I/O
ATC Status, machine diagnostics, HTX500 screen 3 - 34
4 - 65 Blend Offset field, Milling Parameters 4 - 41
ATC Z Axis Position field, ATC and machine Blend Overlap field, Milling Parameters 4 -
diagnostics 4 - 70 41
Auto Balance Enable, machine parameters Block field
3 - 22 Auto Mode 4 - 57
Auto console key 1 - 20 BORDER SIZE field 4 - 14
Auto Mode 4 - 55 Bore Dwell field, Holes Parameters 4 - 45
Monitoring 4 - 56 Bore Orient Retract field, Holes Parameters
Auto Set Restart Marker 4 - 55 4 - 45
Auto tab, Tool Library 4 - 35 BOX LENGTH (X, Y, Z) field 4 - 14
automatic pallet changer 4 - 72 BPRNT/DPRNT OUTPUT DEVICE, NC Set-
automatic tool changer 4 - 61 tings 3 - 5
40-taper 4 - 62 BPRNT/DPRNT OUTPUT FILE, NC Settings
50-taper 4 - 63 3-5
AUTOMATIC TOOL MONITORING field, brightness control 1 - 12
Probing Parameters 4 - 46 location on console 1 - 11
AUTOMATICALLY LOAD TOOLS INTO MTC, Bytes Transferred field, Serial I/O 3 - 34
Tool Utilities and Settings 3 - 6

2 - Index 704-0116-110 Getting Started with WinMax Mill


C chine parameters 3 - 26
Chip Removal field
C Centerline X/Y/Z field 4 - 8
Auto Mode 4 - 56
C console key 1 - 14
CAL to LS Velocity A 3 - 21 DRO 4 - 10
CAL to LS Velocity X 3 - 21 Chip Removal Forward On/Off softkey, Auto
Cal to LS Velocity, machine parameters 3 - Mode 4 - 57
22 CHIPLOAD field, Advanced Tool Settings 4 -
calculator 1 - 8 26
calculator, on-screen A - xiv Choose as Replacement softkey 4 - 34
Calibrate Machine softkey, Manual Mode 4 - Chord Error field, General Parameters 4 -
58 39
Calibrate T/C Magazine F5 CLEAR TOOLS F6 softkey, Tool Library
ATC and machine diagnostics 4 - 71 screen 4 - 36
ATC diagnostics softkeys, HTX500 4 - Collapse and Expand Files 1 - 6
68 COLOR field, Advanced Tool Settings 4 - 24
Calibrating the Machine 1 - 27 Column, machine component 1 - 2
Calibration, Tools 4 - 14 Communications Panel 1 - 22
CE Configuration field 4 - 80 Compute Estimated Run Time softkey, Auto
CE Diagnostics softkey 4 - 79 Mode 4 - 55
CE Safety override mode 4 - 79 Confirmation Or Ready to Rotate pushbut-
CE Status & Diagnostics screen 4 - 80 ton, Remote APC panel 4 - 76
CE2000 4 - 79 console 1 - 2, 1 - 3
Chamfer Angle field, Advanced Tool Set- console buttons
tings 4 - 25 Feed hold 1 - 19
Change Access Code softkey 4 - 81 motion control buttons 1 - 19
Change All Feeds Speeds & Tools softkey Motion hold 1 - 19
4 - 50, 4 - 52 Console Jog Unit 1 - 12
change feeds 4 - 52 console keys 1 - 4
Change Feeds & Speeds by Tool softkey 4 - Auto 1 - 20
50, 4 - 52 C 1 - 14
Change Finish SFQ field 4 - 52 Delete 1 - 14
change program blocks 4 - 50 End 1 - 14
Change Rough SFQ field 4 - 52 Enter 1 - 14
change speeds 4 - 52 F 1 - 14
Change Surface Finish Quality 4 - 52 Home 1 - 14
Change Tool field 4 - 52 Insert 1 - 14
Change Tool Number 4 - 29 Interrupt cycle 1 - 20
softkey 4 - 29 Machine Mode 1 - 20
Change Tool Number field 4 - 50 Machine Mode ,Single 1 - 20
Change Tool Number softkey 4 - 23 Machine Mode ,Test 1 - 20
Tool Library screen 4 - 36 Machine Mode, Auto 1 - 20
change tools 4 - 52 Page Down 1 - 14
Change Z-Start softkey 4 - 51 Page Up 1 - 14
changing access code 4 - 81 Single 1 - 20
Changing Feeds, Speeds, and Tools 4 - 52 Test 1 - 20
Character Length field, Serial Port Settings console knobs
3 - 30 Axis Feed Rate 1 - 15
Check for Errors softkey, Auto Mode 4 - 55 Rapid Override 1 - 15
Chip Conveyor Off Delay Time, machine pa- Spindle Speed 1 - 15
rameters 3 - 26 contrast control 1 - 12
Chip Conveyor On Delay Time, machine pa- control
rameters 3 - 26 power on A - xiv
Chip Conveyor On/Off Delay Enable, ma- control panel 1 - 11
Control Panel Function Groups 1 - 11

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-110 Index — 3


Control Power Off Time, machine parame- D
ters 3 - 20
DB SEARCH F6 softkey, graphics screen 4 -
Control Power Off Timer 1 - 30
84
Conversational Components 4 - 48
DCI/01 - DC Input Output #1 Board 4 - 68
CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAM F1 softkey,
DCI/02 - DC Input Output #2 Board 4 - 68
Program Manager 2 - 2
DCI/03 - DC Input Output #3 Board 4 - 68
CONVERSATIONAL SETTINGS, Utilities
Default Pocket Overlap field, Milling Param-
screen 3 - 5
eters 4 - 43
CONVERT TO LINEAR F7 softkey, Program
DEFAULT REMOTE DIRECTORY field, FTP
Review screen 4 - 54
Host Properties screen 2 - 7
CONVERT TO ROTARY F6 softkey, Program
DEFAULT XML PROGRAM TYPE, Conversa-
Review screen 4 - 54
tional Settings 3 - 5
Coolant Delay Time 3 - 12
Delete Block softkey 4 - 54
machine parameters 3 - 14
Delete Blocks softkey 4 - 50
Coolant field 4 - 20
DELETE DIRECTORY softkey
Advanced Tool Settings 4 - 26
Disk Operations 2 - 6
coolant parameters, defined 3 - 13
Delete key 1 - 14
Coolant Status, machine diagnostics,
DELETE MATERIAL F3 softkey, Tool and Ma-
HTX500 4 - 65
terial Database screen 4 - 37
Coolant Washdown On/Off softkey, Auto
delete program blocks 4 - 51
Mode 4 - 57
Delete softkey
Copy and Change Blocks 4 - 50
Disk Operations 2 - 6
Input screen 4 - 2
Program Review screen 4 - 53
Copy Blocks softkey 4 - 50
Delete Sub Block softkey 4 - 54
COPY DIRECTORY softkey
Delete Tool softkey 4 - 22
Disk Operations 2 - 5
Depletion Retract field, General Parameters
copy program blocks 4 - 51
4 - 40
COPY softkey
DESCRIPTION field, in Program Properties
Disk Operations 2 - 6
2-4
Program Review screen 4 - 53
Device field, Tool Measurement Settings 4 -
Copy Tool softkey 4 - 29
16
CREATE DIRECTORY softkey
DIAGNOSTICS F3 softkey, Manual Mode 4 -
Disk Operations 2 - 6
58
cursor control 1 - 14
Diagnostics screen
CUT DIRECTORY softkey
APC 4 - 74
Disk Operations 2 - 5
Diagnostics softkey 4 - 79
CUT softkey
Diameter field 4 - 19
Disk Operations 2 - 6
Advanced Tool Settings 4 - 25
Program Review screen 4 - 53
Diameter Tolerance field
Cutter Comp Param field, Milling Parame-
Probing Parameters 4 - 46
ters 4 - 43
Diameter Wear field, Tool Setup screen 4 -
Cutting Edges field, Advanced Tool Settings
21
4 - 25
Digital Read Out 4 - 10
Cutting Time field, Tool Setup screen 4 - 21
Direction field
Cycle Pallet Changer F3, APC diagnostics
Advanced Tool Settings 4 - 24
softkeys 4 - 75
Disable Auto On Chip Removal parameter
Cycle Start pushbutton, Remote APC panel
3 - 29
4 - 76
Disable Aux Out During Interrupt, machine
Cycle Stop pushbutton, Remote APC panel
parameters 3 - 25
4 - 76
Disable Tool Picker Option, machine pa-
CYLINDER field 4 - 14
rameters 3 - 20
Disk Operations 2 - 5
softkey, Program Manager 2 - 4

4 - Index 704-0116-110 Getting Started with WinMax Mill


Display Machine Specifications softkey 3 - Enter Access Code softkey 4 - 80
2 Enter key 1 - 14
Utilities screen 3 - 2 entering the access code 4 - 80
DISPLAY UNITS field, in Program Properties Erase Functions 4 - 2
2-4 Input screen 4 - 2
Display WinMax Configuration softkey 3 - 2 ERASE PART SETUP softkey 4 - 2
Utilities screen 3 - 2 ERASE PROGRAM softkey 4 - 2
Door Lock Status field 4 - 80 ERASE TOOL SETUP softkey 4 - 2
Door Switch Status field 4 - 80 Error History 3 - 36
DRAW (PAUSE) softkey, graphics screen 4 - error messages A - xiv
84 European machines 1 - 2
DRAW OPTIONS softkey, graphics screen Exchange Arm 0° / 90° F5, ATC diagnostics
4 - 84 softkeys, HTX500 4 - 67
Drill Angle field, Advanced Tool Settings 4 - Exchange Arm 0º / 60º, ATC & Machine Di-
25 agnostics 4 - 71
Drill Dwell field, Holes Parameters 4 - 45 Exchange Arm 180° F6, ATC diagnostics
drive softkeys, HTX500 4 - 67
jump 1 - 23 Exchange Arm field, ATC and machine diag-
DRO 4 - 10 nostics 4 - 70
drop-down lists 1 - 6 Exchange Arm Jog Reverse F2, ATC diag-
Dry Run softkey, Auto Mode 4 - 56 nostics softkeys, HTX500 4 - 68
Dual 3 - 30 Exchange Arm Jog Reverse F4, ATC and
Dual Tool Probe Present parameter 3 - 30 machine diagnostics 4 - 71
Exchange Arm Rotate F5, ATC and machine
diagnostics 4 - 71
E Exchange Arm, ATC diagnostics, HTX500
Edit Apt Parameters 4 - 29 4 - 67
EDIT MATERIAL softkey, Tool and Material Expand and Collapse Files 1 - 6
Database screen 4 - 37 Export 3 - 10
EDIT MODE, User Interface Settings 3 - 4 EXPORT AUTO AND MANUAL TOOLS soft-
EDIT TOOL softkey, Tool and Material Data- key, Import and Export 3 - 10
base screen 4 - 37 Export Log 3 - 37
EIR Relay State field 4 - 80 Export Manual Tools List softkey, Import
Emergency Stop A - xiv, 1 - 29 and Export 3 - 10
button 1 - 13 Export Tool and Material Database softkey,
button, location on console 1 - 12 Import and Export 3 - 10
Emergency stop Exported NC Decimal Places field, NC Set-
location on console 1 - 11 tings 3 - 5
Emergency Stop pushbutton, Remote APC
panel 4 - 76
ENABLE AUTOMATIC SAVE, Autosave Set- F
tings 3 - 6 F console key 1 - 14
Enable Dual Zones parameter 3 - 20 F(%) field
Enable FTP Server field Auto Mode 4 - 56
FTP Server Settings 3 - 31 DRO 4 - 10
ENABLE PROJECT RESTORE, User Interface Feed & Speed Optimization softkey, Auto
Settings 3 - 4 Mode 4 - 55
ENABLE RUNTIME TOOL DISPLAY field, Feed and Speed 4 - 26, 4 - 27
Graphics Settings 4 - 82 Advanced Tool Settings 4 - 26
Enable Tool SFQ field, Advanced Tool Set- Calculations 4 - 27
tings 4 - 28 Feed field 4 - 21
End Block field 4 - 50, 4 - 52 Advanced Tool Settings 4 - 26
End Block softkey 4 - 51 Auto Mode 4 - 56
End key 1 - 14 DRO 4 - 10

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-110 Index — 5


Feed Hold console button 1 - 19 On-screen Help 1 - 9
Feed/Flute (Tooth) field 4 - 21 Help key 1 - 14
Filename Format field, FTP Host Properties Holes Parameters 4 - 45
screen 2 - 7 Home key 1 - 14
Finish Feed (%) 4 - 42 HTX500 tool magazine 4 - 64
Finish SFQ field 4 - 52 Hydraulic Lift pushbutton, Remote APC
Finish Speed (%) 4 - 42 panel 4 - 76
Finish XY field, Milling Parameters 4 - 42 Hydraulic Status
Finish Z field, Milling Parameters 4 - 43 APC diagnostics 4 - 75
First Peck Offset field, General Parameters ATC diagnostics, HTX500 4 - 67
4 - 40 Hydraulic Status, machine diagnostics,
Fit to View softkey HTX500 4 - 65
graphics screen 4 - 84
Flutes field 4 - 21
Advanced Tool Settings 4 - 25 I
formula I/O Maps
Washdown Off Delay Timer 3 - 18 DCI/01 4 - 68
Washdown On Delay Timer 3 - 17 DCI/02 4 - 68
FTP Host 2 - 7 DCI/03 4 - 68
Properties 2 - 7 IOIF 4 - 68
FTP Manager 2 - 6 icons A - xv
FTP Manager softkey Import 4 - 2
Disk Operations 2 - 6 Import and Export 3 - 10
FTP Server softkey, Tool Utilities and Settings 3 - 7
Port field, FTP Server Settings 3 - 31 Import Functions 4 - 48
FTP Server Settings Input screen 4 - 2
softkey, Utilities screen 3 - 31 Import Into Manual Tool List softkey, Im-
Full Precision Editing 1 - 5 port and Export 3 - 10
Import Manual Tools, Import and Export 3 -
10
G Import softkey 2 - 2
G05.3 Surface Finish Quality 4 - 28 Importing NC States into Conversational
Gauge Device setup, with Absolute Tool Programs 4 - 49
Length Mode 4 - 15 indexer port 1 - 23
General Parameters 1 4 - 39 initiate manual pallet change from load sta-
General Parameters 2 4 - 40 tion 4 - 77
Geometry, Advanced Tool Settings 4 - 24 Input
Graphics 4 - 82 key 1 - 13
Graphics Chord Error field, Graphics Set- Input Mode 4 - 2
tings 4 - 83 Insert Arc field, Milling Parameters 4 - 43
Graphics screen, location on console 1 - 11 Insert Block / Sub Block Before softkey 4 -
Graphics Settings 4 - 82 54
for Stock Geomety 4 - 13 Insert key 1 - 14
softkey 4 - 82 Insert Line field, Milling Parameters 4 - 43
softkey, graphics screen 4 - 84 INSERT TOOL F3 softkey, Tool Library
screen 4 - 36
Integrator Configuration Parameters, N95
H codes 3 - 19
hardware options 1 - 2 INTEGRATOR SUPPORT SERIVICES F4 soft-
HD3 Save Program Type, Conversational key, Utilities screen 3 - 32
Settings 3 - 5 Integrator Support Services 3 - 33
Height field, Tool Measurement Settings 4 - Interrupt console key 1 - 20
16 Interrupt Cycle Z Retract field, General Pa-
Help rameters 4 - 40

6 - Index 704-0116-110 Getting Started with WinMax Mill


IO Maps F1, ATC diagnostics softkeys, Machine and Part Axes field, DRO 4 - 10
HTX500 4 - 68 Machine Class field 3 - 2
IOIF - Input/Output Interface Board 4 - 68 Machine Components 1 - 2
IP ADDRESS field, FTP Host Properties machine coordinate system, part setup 4 -
screen 2 - 7 5
Machine Diagnostics screen
Air Pressure, HTX500 4 - 65
J ATC Status,HTX500 4 - 65
jog Coolant Status, HTX500 4 - 65
control buttons 1 - 16 Hydraulic Status, HTX500 4 - 65
parameters 1 - 18 Overload Status, HTX500 4 - 66
jog unit 1 - 16 Spindle Chiller, HTX500 4 - 66
jump drive 1 - 23 Spindle Status, HTX500 4 - 65
Tool in Spindle, HTX500 4 - 65
Way Lube Level, HTX500 4 - 65
K MACHINE FUNCTION softkey 4 - 73
keyboard 1 - 4, 1 - 8, 1 - 13 Machine Hour Meter field 3 - 3
optional 1 - 14 Machine Operation Keys 1 - 12
Machine Operations 1 - 20
L Machine operations, location on console 1 -
11
Language Registration 3 - 31
Machine Parameters 3 - 11
large tools in the ATC magazine 1 - 26
Alt Dwell Lt Side 3 - 16
Length of Cut field, Advanced Tool Settings
Alt Washdown Dwell 3 - 15
4 - 25
Alt Washdown Off Time 3 - 17
Limited Manual Operations field 4 - 80
ATC Disable 3 - 22
List Control Rows field, User Interface Set-
Auto Balance Enable 3 - 22
tings 3 - 4
Aux Output Confirmation Enable 3 - 25
List Icon Size field, User Interface Settings
Axis Feedrate Override Min (%) 3 - 29
3-4
Cal to LS Velocity 3 - 22
Load softkey 2 - 2
CAL to LS Velocity A 3 - 21
Disk Operations 2 - 6
CAL to LS Velocity X 3 - 21
loading
Chip Conveyor Off Delay Time 3 - 26
tool in the spindle 1 - 24
Chip Conveyor On Delay Time 3 - 26
tools in ATC magazine 1 - 25
Chip Conveyor On/Off Delay Enable 3 -
Location field 4 - 18
26
Log Files 3 - 32, 3 - 35
Control Power Off Time 3 - 20
Lower Pallet Changer F7, APC diagnostics
Coolant Delay Time 3 - 12, 3 - 14
softkeys 4 - 75
Disable Auto On Chip Removal 3 - 29
Disable Aux Out During Interrupt 3 - 25
M Disable Tool Picker Option 3 - 20
machine Dual Tool Probe Present 3 - 30
Auto mode key 1 - 20 Enable Dual Zones 3 - 20
components 1 - 2 Move to Safety Pos Manual Mode ATC
control 1 - 15 3 - 26
control buttons 1 - 19 Pulsating or Delay Washdown Enable
major components 1 - 2 3 - 14
mode console keys 1 - 20 Rapid Feedrate Override Min (%) 3 - 30
Single mode console key 1 - 20 Rapid Override Disable 3 - 22
Test mode console key 1 - 20 Tilt Axis Safety Position 3 - 23
Machine and Console Basics 1 - 1 Warm-Up Axis Feed Rate 3 - 28
Machine and Part Axes field, Auto Mode 4 - Warm-up Axis Feed Rate 3 - 29
56 Warm-Up Cycle Time Per Pass 3 - 28
Warm-up Cycle Time Per Pass 3 - 29

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-110 Index — 7


Warm-Up Max Spindle Speed 3 - 28 Manual Spindle Speed parameter 1 - 18
Warm-up Max Spindle Speed 3 - 29 Manual Stock Sizing field 4 - 13
Warm-Up Speed Steps 3 - 28 Manual tab, Tool Library 4 - 36
Warm-up Speed Steps 3 - 29 Manual Table Release lever, APC Table 4 -
Warm-Up Starting Speed 3 - 28 78
Warm-up Starting Speed 3 - 29 manually operate the APC from the load
Washdown Off Delay Timer 3 - 12, 3 - station 4 - 76
18 Match Tools softkey
Washdown On Delay Timer 3 - 17 Tool Review screen 4 - 33
X-Axis Safety Position 3 - 21 Unmatched Tools Review 4 - 33
Y-Axis Safety Position 3 - 21 Matching tools 4 - 33
Magazine CCW F4, ATC diagnostics soft- Material Database 4 - 37
keys, HTX500 4 - 68 Material field, in Program Properties 2 - 4
Magazine CCW F5, ATC and machine diag- Math Assist Style, Conversational Settings
nostics 4 - 71 3-5
Magazine CW F3, ATC diagnostics softkeys, Max console
HTX500 4 - 67 console keys 1 - 12
Magazine CW, ATC and machine diagnos- panel group figure 1 - 12
tics 4 - 71 panel groups 1 - 12
Magazine field, DRO 4 - 10 Max Depth field, Advanced Tool Settings 4 -
Magazine In Position, ATC and machine di- 26
agnostics 4 - 70 Max Memory Load field 3 - 4
Magazine Lock, ATC and machine diagnos- Maximum Contouring Rate field 3 - 3
tics 4 - 70 Maximum Idle Time (Mins) field
Magazine Pin Lock / Unlock F2, ATC and FTP Server Settings 3 - 31
machine diagnostics 4 - 71 Maximum Rapid Traverse Rate field 3 - 3
Magazine Pin, ATC diagnostics, HTX500 4 - Maximum Spindle Motor Speed field 3 - 3
67 Maximum Spindle Tool Speed field 3 - 3
Magazine Position field, ATC and machine messages
diagnostics 4 - 70 error A - xiv
Magazine Position, ATC diagnostics, Milling Direction field, Milling Parameters
HTX500 4 - 66 4 - 43
Magazine Reference, ATC and machine di- Milling Parameters 1 4 - 41
agnostics 4 - 70 Milling Parameters 2 4 - 44
Magazine Status, ATC diagnostics, HTX500 Minus/Plus X Direction Travel Limit field 3 -
4 - 67 3
manual APC table rotation 4 - 78 Minus/Plus Y Direction Travel Limit field 3 -
Manual Border Sizing field 4 - 14 3
Manual console key 1 - 20 mode
Manual Function Setup 4 - 58 programming A - xiv
softkey, Manual Mode 4 - 58 Modify Dimensions 4 - 51
manual jog softkey 4 - 50
feed keys 1 - 17 Motion Hold button 1 - 19
feed parameter 1 - 18 Move Axes to T/C Position softkey, ATC and
hand wheel 1 - 17 machine diagnostics 4 - 72
hand wheel multiplier keys 1 - 17 Move Axes to TC Position F1, ATC diagnos-
Manual Jog Feed field, Manual Mode 4 - 58 tics softkeys, HTX500 4 - 67
Manual Mode 4 - 58 Move Blocks softkey 4 - 50
Tool Library 4 - 35 move program blocks 4 - 51
Manual Rapid Move 4 - 59 Move to Safe Pos During TC field, General
softkey, Manual Mode 4 - 59 Parameters 4 - 40
Manual Spindle Speed field, Manual Mode Move to Safety Pos Manual Mode ATC, ma-
4 - 58 chine parameters 3 - 26

8 - Index 704-0116-110 Getting Started with WinMax Mill


Move Tool To Spindle softkey, Tool Library Open softkey 2 - 2
screen 4 - 35, 4 - 36 operating the APC 4 - 73
Move Z Axis to Zero Position F1, APC diag- Opt Stop On (Off) field
nostics softkeys 4 - 75 Auto Mode 4 - 56
Move Z-Axis to T/C Height F6, ATC and ma- DRO 4 - 10
chine diagnostics 4 - 71 optional keyboard 1 - 14
Move Z-Axis to Zero Position F2, ATC diag- Optional Stop On/Off softkey, Auto Mode
nostics softkeys, HTX500 4 - 67 4 - 57
Move Z-Axis to Zero, ATC and machine di- options
agnostics 4 - 71 hardware and software 1 - 2
Multiple Block Functions softkey, Program Orient Spindle F1, ATC diagnostics soft-
Review screen 4 - 53 keys, HTX500 4 - 67
Orient Spindle softkey, Manual Mode 4 - 58
Orient Spindle, ATC and machine diagnos-
N tics 4 - 71
N95 Codes (Integrator Configuration Pa- Orientation field, DRO 4 - 10
rameters) 3 - 19 orientation hole 1 - 24
NAME field, in Program Properties 2 - 4 orientation key 1 - 24
NC dialect 2 - 4 Overload Status, machine diagnostics,
NC Dialect field, NC Settings 3 - 5 HTX500 4 - 66
NC Display Type, NC Settings 3 - 5 override
NC Monitor softkey knobs 1 - 15
Auto Mode 4 - 57 Override Lockout field, General Parameters
NC/Conversational Merge 4 - 56 4 - 39
NC Program softkey, Program Manager 2 -
2
NC Settings softkey, Utilities screen 3 - 5 P
NC SFQ, Advanced Tool Settings 4 - 28 Page Down key 1 - 14
NC States 4 - 48 Page Up key 1 - 14
NC Variables 4 - 49 pallet changer 4 - 72
Neck Diameter field, Advanced Tool Set- initiate manual operation from load
tings 4 - 25 station 4 - 77
network 1 - 22 Manual Table Release lever 4 - 78
network ports 1 - 23 manual table rotation 4 - 78
New Feed field 4 - 50, 4 - 52 pallet diagnostics
New Finish Tool field 4 - 50, 4 - 52 APC Decel Sw 4 - 75
New Plunge Feed field 4 - 50, 4 - 52 APC Pin 4 - 75
New softkey, Program Manager 2 - 2 APC Position 4 - 74
New Speed (RPM) field 4 - 50, 4 - 52 APC Reference 4 - 75
New Tool field 4 - 50, 4 - 52 ATC Status 4 - 75
Next Tool Change softkey, graphics screen Hydraulic Status 4 - 75
4 - 84 Pallet in Machine 4 - 74
Next Tool field, Tool Library screen 4 - 35 Pallet Status 4 - 75
Notes field, Tool Measurement Settings 4 - Z-Axis Position 4 - 75
16 pallet diagnostics softkeys
Notes, Advanced Tool Settings 4 - 28 Cycle Paller Changer F3 4 - 75
Number of Axes Present field 3 - 2 Lower Pallet Changer F7 4 - 75
numeric keypad 1 - 14 Move Z Axis to Zero Position F1 4 - 75
Raise Pallet Changer F4 4 - 75
Rotate APC to Position 1 F5 4 - 75
O Rotate APC to Position 2 F6 4 - 75
Offset Z field 4 - 8, 4 - 15 Square Pallet for Rotation F2 4 - 75
on-screen calculator A - xiv Pallet in Machine, APC diagnostics 4 - 74
On-screen Help 1 - 9 Pallet Status, APC diagnostics 4 - 75

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-110 Index — 9


Pan softkey Path field
graphics screen 4 - 84 FTP Server Settings 3 - 31
parameters Peck Clearance Plane field, General Param-
jog unit 1 - 18 eters 4 - 39
manual jog feed 1 - 18 Peck Depth field
manual spindle speed 1 - 18 Advanced Tool Settings 4 - 26
Parity field, Serial Port Settings 3 - 30 Performance Parameters 4 - 47
Park Machine 1 - 29 Plunge Feed field
softkey, Manual Mode 4 - 58 Advanced Tool Settings 4 - 27
Part Count field, Auto Mode 4 - 57 Plunges field, Graphics Settings 4 - 82
Part Fixturing and Tool Loading 4 - 11 pop-ups 1 - 7
Part Inspection files 3 - 33 port
part program pin descriptions 1 - 23
printing 3 - 32 USB 1 - 23
Part Program Printing softkey 3 - 32 Power Drawbar 1 - 2
Part Program Tool Review 4 - 30 Power On button 1 - 19
softkey 4 - 23, 4 - 54 location on console 1 - 11, 1 - 12
Part Program Tool Review Softkeys 4 - 32 power-on
Part Program Tool Review, NC Programs 4 - control A - xiv
31 Printing
Part Programming Part Program 3 - 32
Input screen 4 - 2 Probing Data 3 - 33
softkey 4 - 22, 4 - 54 printing A - xv
softkey, Tool Review screen 4 - 32 Printing Setup 3 - 32
Part Setup 4 - 3 softkey, in Utilities screen 3 - 32
Calculate Rotary Offsets 4 - 11 Probing Data Printing 3 - 33
fields 4 - 8 softkey 3 - 32
Orient Spindle 4 - 11 Probing Parameters 4 - 46
Part Probing 4 - 11 Program Manager 2 - 1
Part Programming 4 - 11 Input screen 4 - 2
Program Parameters 4 - 11 Program Parameters 4 - 38
softkey 4 - 22, 4 - 54 Input screen 4 - 2
softkey, Tool Review screen 4 - 32 Program Parameters softkey 4 - 23, 4 - 54
Stock Geometry 4 - 11 Tool Review screen 4 - 32
Store Machine Position 4 - 11 Program Properties 2 - 4
Toggle Units 4 - 11 Program Review screen 4 - 53
Tool Setup 4 - 11 Program Run Time field
Work Offsets 4 - 11 Auto Mode 4 - 56
Part Setup softkeys 4 - 11 DRO 4 - 10
Part Surface field, Graphics Settings 4 - 82 program status A - xiv
Part Zero A / B field 4 - 8 PROGRAM TYPE, in Program Properties 2 -
Part Zero X / Y fields 4 - 8 4
Part Zero Z field 4 - 8 Programming Keyboard, location on con-
Password field sole 1 - 11, 1 - 12
FTP Host Properties screen 2 - 7 programming mode keys 1 - 13
FTP Server Settings 3 - 31 Protocol field, Serial Port Settings 3 - 30
Paste Into Directory softkey Pulsating or Delay Washdown Enable, ma-
Disk Operations 2 - 5 chine parameters 3 - 14
Paste softkey Put Block Before field 4 - 50
Disk Operations 2 - 6
Program Review screen 4 - 53
PATH field R
in Program Properties 2 - 4 R(%) field, Auto Mode 4 - 56
R(%) field, DRO 4 - 10

10 - Index 704-0116-110 Getting Started with WinMax Mill


Radius field, Advanced Tool Settings 4 - 25 RESTORE WINMAX DEFAULTS F6 softkey,
Raise Pallet Changer F4, APC diagnostics Program Parameters 4 - 38
softkeys 4 - 75 Retain Probed Part Setup field, Probing Pa-
Rapid Feedrate Override Min (%) parame- rameters 4 - 46
ter 3 - 30 Retract Clearance field, General Parameters
Rapid Override dial 1 - 15 4 - 39
Rapid Override Disable, machine parame- Retract Tool softkey, Manual Mode 4 - 59
ters 3 - 22 Retrieve Log and Diagnostic Files 3 - 37
Rapid Traverse field, General Parameters Review key 1 - 14
4 - 39 Review Mode 4 - 53
RAPIDS field, Graphics Settings 4 - 82 Review, Tools in Part Program 4 - 30
Ream Chamfer field, Advanced Tool Set- Rotate APC to Position 1 F5, APC diagnos-
tings 4 - 25 tics softkeys 4 - 75
Recovery and Restart 1 - 28 Rotate APC to Position 2 F6, APC diagnos-
Recovery Restart softkey, Auto Mode 4 - 55 tics softkeys 4 - 75
Remote APC panel ROTATE F5 softkey, graphics screen 4 - 84
APC Table Rotate to Position 1 Rough SFQ field 4 - 52
pushbutton 4 - 77 RS-232 C
APC Table Rotate to Position 2 serial communications 1 - 22
pushbutton 4 - 77 serial port 1 - 22
Cycle Start pushbutton 4 - 76 Run Program softkey, Auto Mode 4 - 56
Cycle Stop pushbutton 4 - 76
Emergency Stop pushbutton 4 - 76
Hydraulic Lift pushbutton 4 - 76 S
Workzone Confirmation Or Ready to S(%) field
Rotate pushbutton 4 - 76 Auto Mode 4 - 56
Remote jog DRO 4 - 10
location on console 1 - 11 safety
remote jog CE safety circuit switches 4 - 79
unit 1 - 16 override mode 4 - 79
remote jog unit 1 - 16 Safety Work Region field 4 - 9
REMOVE TOOL F3 softkey, Tool and Materi- sample screens A - xiii
al Database screen 4 - 37 SAVE 2 - 3
removing tools from the ATC 1 - 26 SAVE ACTIVE PROGRAM ONLY, Autosave
RENAME DIRECTORY F5 softkey Settings 3 - 6
Disk Operations 2 - 6 SAVE AS 2 - 3
RENAME F4 softkey SAVE AS USER DEFAULTS F4 softkey, Pro-
Disk Operations 2 - 6 gram Parameters 4 - 38
Replace Tool and Material Database soft- SAVE FREQUENCY, Autosave Settings 3 - 6
key, Import and Export 3 - 10 Save to Database softkey 4 - 34
Reset Control 1 - 28 screen
Reset Part Count softkey, Auto Mode 4 - 57 CE Status & Diagnostics 4 - 80
RESET PROGRAM PARAMETERS F3 4 - 2 SCREENSAVER TIMEOUT, User Interface
Reset Restart Marker 4 - 56 Settings 3 - 4
Reset Servos and Spindle softkey, Manual Select DRO softkey, Auto Mode 4 - 57
Mode 4 - 58 SELECT LANGUAGE F5 softkey, Utilities
restart after emergency stop 1 - 13 screen 3 - 31
Restart Control 3 - 33 SELECT MATERIAL FOR PART PROGRAM F5
Utilities screen 3 - 32, 3 - 33 softkey, Tool and Material Database
Restart Markers, NC 4 - 55 screen 4 - 37
Restore Config & Machine Files 3 - 3 Select Surface 4 - 47
softkey 3 - 2 SELECT VIEW F2 softkey, graphics screen
RESTORE USER DEFAULTS F5 softkey, Pro- 4 - 84
gram Parameters 4 - 38 SelectSurface Finish Quality 4 - 38, 4 - 47

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-110 Index — 11


Serial I/O 3 - 32, 3 - 34 Spindle Clamp, ATC and machine diagnos-
Serial Port Settings 3 - 30 tics 4 - 70
SERIAL PORT SETTINGS F1 softkey, Utili- Spindle Clamp/Unclamp F4 4 - 71
ties screen 3 - 3 Spindle field
serial ports 1 - 23 Auto Mode 4 - 56
Servo Power 1 - 27 DRO 4 - 10
Set Length Using Touch-Off Device softkey Spindle Load Monitor field, Auto Mode 4 -
4 - 23 56
Set Restart Marker 4 - 55 Spindle Motor 1 - 2
Set Tool Zero softkey 4 - 22 Spindle Orientation, ATC and machine di-
Set Tool Zero Using Gauge Block softkey agnostics 4 - 70
4 - 23 Spindle Speed dial 1 - 15
SFQ 4 - 47 Spindle Status, ATC diagnostics, HTX500
Shank Diameter field 4 - 20 4 - 66
Shank Diameter field, Advanced Tool Set- Spindle Status, machine diagnostics,
tings 4 - 25 HTX500 4 - 65
shift offset 4 - 12 Spindle tab, Tool Library 4 - 35
SHOW ALL FILE TYPES, User Interface Set- Spindle Unclamp button 1 - 24
tings 3 - 4 Spindle Unclamp PB, ATC and machine di-
SHOW GRAPHICS field, Graphics Settings agnostics 4 - 70
4 - 82 Square Pallet for Rotation F2, APC diagnos-
SHOW PECKS OF 3D SURFACES field, tics softkeys 4 - 75
Graphics Settings 4 - 82 squaring the APC table 4 - 72
SHOW PECKS OF CONTOURS field, Graph- Standard Calculator 3 - 5
ics Settings 4 - 82 Start Block field 4 - 50, 4 - 52
Shutdown Control 3 - 34 Start Block softkey 4 - 51
SHUTDOWN CONTROL F6 softkey, Utilities Start Cycle console button 1 - 19
screen 3 - 32 Start Marker, NC 4 - 55
SHUTDOWN CONTROL softkey Start Pushbutton, ATC and machine diag-
Utilities screen 3 - 34 nostics 4 - 70
Single console key 1 - 20 Status Bar 1 - 8
single key 1 - 20 Status field, Serial I/O 3 - 34
SINGLE STEP F3 softkey, graphics screen Status History 3 - 36
4 - 84 status, program A - xiv
Smoothing Tolerance 4 - 47 Stock Geometry 4 - 13
SNAPSHOT F7 softkey, graphics screen 4 - Part Setup 4 - 13
84 Stock Geometry screen 4 - 13
SOFTKEY MENU POSITION, User Interface BORDER SIZE 4 - 14
Settings 3 - 4 BOX LENGTH (X, Y, Z) 4 - 14
softkeys 1 - 4, 1 - 5, 1 - 13 CYLINDER 4 - 14
software options 1 - 2 MANUAL BORDER SIZING 4 - 14
special function keys 1 - 14 MANUAL STOCK SIZING 4 - 13
Speed (RPM) field 4 - 20 STOCK TYPE 4 - 13
SPEED field, Advanced Tool Settings 4 - 26 X REF POSITION 4 - 14
Spindle 1 - 2, 1 - 24 Y REF POSITION 4 - 14
spindle Z REF POSITION 4 - 14
control 1 - 15 ZERO REF 4 - 14
manual speed 1 - 18 STOCK OUTLINE field, Graphics Settings
tool removal 1 - 24 4 - 82
Spindle Chiller, machine diagnostics, STOCK OUTLINE, Graphics Settings 4 - 13
HTX500 4 - 66 STOCK TYPE field 4 - 13
Spindle Clamp / Unclamp F5, ATC diagnos- Stop Bits field, Serial Port Settings 3 - 30
tics softkeys, HTX500 4 - 67 Stop Cycle console button 1 - 19

12 - Index 704-0116-110 Getting Started with WinMax Mill


Store Position key 1 - 17 tool changer 1 - 24
Stylus Length field, Advanced Tool Settings orientation key 1 - 24
4 - 25 tool changer (see Automatic Tool Changer)
Supplier, Advanced Tool Settings 4 - 28 4 - 61
Surface Finish Quality 4 - 47 Tool Geometry 4 - 24
G05.3 4 - 28 Tool Holder 4 - 70
Surface Speed field ATC diagnostics, HTX500 4 - 66
Advanced Tool Settings 4 - 26 Tool Holder 0° / 90° F3, ATC diagnostics
FPM 4 - 20 softkeys, HTX500 4 - 67
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION F1 softkey, Utili- Tool Holder Up / Down, ATC and machine
ties screen 3 - 2 diagnostics 4 - 71
Tool Home softkey 4 - 22
Tool in Spindle
T ATC diagnostics, HTX500 4 - 66
Table 1 - 2 machine diagnostics, HTX500 4 - 65
Table Top Z field, Tool Measurement Set- Tool in Spindle field
tings 4 - 16 Auto Mode 4 - 56
Table Top Z position, setting 4 - 16 DRO 4 - 10
Test console key 1 - 20 TOOL IN SPINDLE field, Tool Library screen
Test key 1 - 20 4 - 35
Text screen 1 - 13 Tool Information and Printing 3 - 8
location on console 1 - 11 Tool Information Printing
Thread Diameter field 4 - 20 softkey 3 - 32
Thread Diameter field, Advanced Tool Set- TOOL INFORMATION PRINTING F6 softkey,
tings 4 - 25 Tool Utilities and Settings 3 - 7
Threads per inch field, Advanced Tool Set- Tool Length field, Advanced Tool Settings
tings 4 - 25 4 - 25
Tilt Axis Safety Position, machine parame- Tool Library 4 - 35
ters 3 - 23 Auto 4 - 35
time 1 - 8 Manual 4 - 35, 4 - 36
Tip Angle field, Advanced Tool Settings 4 - Spindle 4 - 35
25 tool magazine
Tip Diameter field, Advanced Tool Settings HTX500 4 - 64
4 - 25 VTXU 4 - 64
Tip Length field, Advanced Tool Settings 4 - Tool Management softkey, Manual Mode 4 -
25 58
Toggle Rapid Override Enable softkey, Auto Tool Matching 4 - 33
Mode 4 - 58 Results 4 - 33
tool Tool Measurement 4 - 16
holder, orientation hole 1 - 24 Tool Measurement screen 4 - 16
in Spindle 1 - 24 Tool Measurement Settings softkey 4 - 23
loading, machine spindle 1 - 24 Tool Number field 4 - 18
removal from ATC magazine 1 - 26 Tool Offsets softkey 4 - 22
removal from spindle 1 - 24 TOOL PATH field, Graphics Settings 4 - 82
Tool & Material Library 4 - 35 Tool Pocket 4 - 70
Tool and Material Database 4 - 37 Tool Probing softkey 4 - 23
Tool Cal Length field 4 - 19 TOOL REVIEW
Tool Calibration Mode field, Tool Utilities Input Screen 4 - 2
and Settings 3 - 6 Tool Setup 4 - 14
Tool Calibration Modes 4 - 14 Tool Setup Fields 4 - 18, 4 - 21
Tool Change Optimization field, General Pa- Coolant 4 - 20
rameters 4 - 40 Cutting Time 4 - 21
Tool Change Review Screen softkey Diameter 4 - 19
Tool Review Screen 4 - 32 Diameter Wear 4 - 21

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-110 Index — 13


Feed 4 - 21 unit of measure 1 - 8
Feed/Flute (Tooth) 4 - 21 units of measure A - xiv
Flutes 4 - 21 UNLOAD PROGRAM F5 4 - 2
Location 4 - 18 unrotated coordinate system, part setup
Shank Diameter 4 - 20 4-5
Speed (RPM) 4 - 20 Update Data Blocks With Tool Changes
Surface Speed (FPM) 4 - 20 field, Tool Utilities and Settings 3 - 7
Thread Diameter 4 - 20 Upgrade Motion Control Firmware softkey
Tool Cal Length 4 - 19 3-2
Tool Number 4 - 18 USB port 1 - 23
Tool Type 4 - 19 USE CHORD ERROR FROM PROGRAM field,
Touch-Off Device 4 - 19 Graphics Settings 4 - 82
TPI (or PITCH) 4 - 20 Use Editing File softkey, Auto Mode 4 - 55
Zero Calibration 4 - 19 USE TOOL TYPE CHECKING, Tool Utilities
Tool Setup softkey and Settings 3 - 6, 3 - 7
Tool Review screen 4 - 32 User defined value 4 - 27
Tool Setup Softkeys 4 - 22, 4 - 23 USER INTERFACE SETTTINGS softkey, Util-
Advanced Tool Settings 4 - 23 ities screen 3 - 4
Change Tool Number 4 - 23 User Name field, FTP Server Settings 3 - 31
Delete Tool 4 - 22 USER PREFERENCES softkey, Utilities
Part Program Tool Review 4 - 23 screen 3 - 3
Part Programming 4 - 22 USERNAME field, FTP Host Properties
Part Setup 4 - 22 screen 2 - 7
Program Parameters 4 - 23 using this manual A - xiii
Set Length Using Touch-Off Device 4 - Utilities 3 - 1
23
Set Tool Zero 4 - 22
Set Tool Zero Using Gauge Block 4 - 23 V
Tool Home 4 - 22 Vertical/Horizontal field 3 - 2
Tool Measurement Settings 4 - 23 VTXU
Tool Offsets 4 - 22 tool magazine 4 - 64
Tool Probing 4 - 23
Tool Type field 4 - 19
Tool Type Setup/Advanced Tool Settings
W
4 - 37 Warm Up Machine softkey, Manual Mode
Tool Utilities and Settings 3 - 6 4 - 58
Toolpath and Solid Graphics 4 - 83 Warming Up the Machine 1 - 27
Toolpath Graphics 4 - 83 Warm-Up Axis Feed Rate 3 - 28, 3 - 29
Touch-Off Device field 4 - 19 Warm-Up Cycle Time Per Pass 3 - 28, 3 -
Tool Measurement Settings 4 - 16 29
touchscreen 1 - 4 Warm-Up Max Spindle Speed 3 - 28
Touchscreen softkeys, location on console Warm-up Max Spindle Speed 3 - 29
1 - 11 Warm-Up Speed Steps 3 - 28, 3 - 29
TPI (or PITCH) field 4 - 20 Warm-Up Starting Speed 3 - 28, 3 - 29
Trackball, location on console 1 - 11 WARN BEFORE SAVING IN OLD FORMAT,
Transfer 2 - 6 User Interface Settings 3 - 4
transfer files washdown
jump drive 1 - 23 Y-axis rear way cover 3 - 13
Washdown Coolant On/Off softkey, Manual
Mode 4 - 59
U Washdown Off Delay Timer 3 - 12, 3 - 18
Ultimax 4 and Max consoles 1 - 3 recommended formula 3 - 18
Ultimax classic edit mode 1 - 4 Washdown On Delay Timer 3 - 17
Ultimax Classic Math Assist 3 - 5 recommended formula 3 - 17

14 - Index 704-0116-110 Getting Started with WinMax Mill


Way Cover 1 - 2
Way Lube Level
ATC and machine diagnostics 4 - 70
machine diagnostics, HTX500 4 - 65
WINMAX UPTIME F3 softkey, Utilities
screen 3 - 31
Work Offsets 4 - 12
Worklight On/Off softkey
Auto Mode 4 - 58
Manual Mode 4 - 59
workpiece coordinate system, part setup
4-5
WRITE PROTECTION field, in Program Prop-
erties 2 - 4

X
X Offset softkey 4 - 51
X REF POSITION field 4 - 14
X-Axis Safety Position 3 - 21

Y
Y Offset softkey 4 - 51
Y REF POSITION field 4 - 14
Y-axis rear way cover washdown on and off
cycles 3 - 13
Y-Axis Safety Position 3 - 21

Z
Z Location field, Tool Measurement Settings
4 - 16
Z Offset softkey 4 - 51
Z REF POSITION field 4 - 14
Z Table Offset
Part Setup 4 - 10
Z-Axis Position
APC diagnostics 4 - 75
ATC diagnostics, HTX500 4 - 66
Z-Axis Servo 1 - 2
ZERO CAL (LENGTH) TOLERANCE field,
Probing Parameters 4 - 46
Zero Calibration field 4 - 19
Zero Calibration Mode 4 - 15
ZERO REF field 4 - 14
Zone field
Auto Mode Monitoring screen 4 - 56
DRO 4 - 10
ZOOM F3 softkey, graphics screen 4 - 84
ZOOM IN F1 softkey, graphics screen 4 - 84
ZOOM OUT F2 softkey, graphics screen 4 -
84

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-110 Index — 15


- 16 Index 704-0116-110 Getting Started with WinMax Mill

You might also like